Extron DMP 128 FlexPlus Manual

Extron DMP 128 FlexPlus Manual
User Guide
Audio Products
Mixers and Processors
DMP 128 FlexPlus
ProDSP Digital Matrix Processor
68-3428-01 Rev. A
11 19
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions • English
Istruzioni di sicurezza • Italiano
AVVERTENZA:
Il simbolo,
, se usato sul prodotto, serve ad
avvertire l’utente della presenza di tensione non isolata pericolosa
all’interno del contenitore del prodotto che può costituire un rischio di
scosse elettriche.
WARNING: This symbol,
, when used on the product, is intended to
alert the user of the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the
product’s enclosure that may present a risk of electric shock.
ATTENTION: This symbol,
, when used on the product, is intended
to alert the user of important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature provided with the equipment.
For information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF
compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the Extron Safety and
Regulatory Compliance Guide, part number 68-290-01, on the Extron
website, www.extron.com.
Sicherheitsanweisungen • Deutsch
WARNUNG: Dieses Symbol
auf dem Produkt soll den Benutzer darauf
aufmerksam machen, dass im Inneren des Gehäuses dieses Produktes
gefährliche Spannungen herrschen, die nicht isoliert sind und die einen
elektrischen Schlag verursachen können.
VORSICHT: Dieses Symbol
auf dem Produkt soll dem Benutzer in
der im Lieferumfang enthaltenen Dokumentation besonders wichtige
Hinweise zur Bedienung und Wartung (Instandhaltung) geben.
Weitere Informationen über die Sicherheitsrichtlinien, Produkthandhabung,
EMI/EMF-Kompatibilität, Zugänglichkeit und verwandte Themen finden Sie in
den Extron-Richtlinien für Sicherheit und Handhabung (Artikelnummer
68-290-01) auf der Extron-Website, www.extron.com.
Instrucciones de seguridad • Español
ADVERTENCIA: Este símbolo,
, cuando se utiliza en el producto,
avisa al usuario de la presencia de voltaje peligroso sin aislar dentro del
producto, lo que puede representar un riesgo de descarga eléctrica.
ATENCIÓN: Este símbolo,
, cuando se utiliza en el producto, avisa
al usuario de la presencia de importantes instrucciones de uso y
mantenimiento recogidas en la documentación proporcionada con el
equipo.
Para obtener información sobre directrices de seguridad, cumplimiento
de normativas, compatibilidad electromagnética, accesibilidad y temas
relacionados, consulte la Guía de cumplimiento de normativas y seguridad
de Extron, referencia 68-290-01, en el sitio Web de Extron, www.extron.com.
Instructions de sécurité • Français
AVERTISSEMENT :
Ce pictogramme,
, lorsqu’il est utilisé sur le
produit, signale à l’utilisateur la présence à l’intérieur du boîtier du
produit d’une tension électrique dangereuse susceptible de provoquer
un choc électrique.
ATTENTION : Ce pictogramme,
, lorsqu’il est utilisé sur le produit,
signale à l’utilisateur des instructions d’utilisation ou de maintenance
importantes qui se trouvent dans la documentation fournie avec le
matériel.
Pour en savoir plus sur les règles de sécurité, la conformité à la
réglementation, la compatibilité EMI/EMF, l’accessibilité, et autres sujets
connexes, lisez les informations de sécurité et de conformité Extron, réf.
68‑290-01, sur le site Extron, www.extron.com.
ATTENTZIONE: Il simbolo,
, se usato sul prodotto, serve ad avvertire
l’utente della presenza di importanti istruzioni di funzionamento e
manutenzione nella documentazione fornita con l’apparecchio.
Per informazioni su parametri di sicurezza, conformità alle normative,
compatibilità EMI/EMF, accessibilità e argomenti simili, fare riferimento
alla Guida alla conformità normativa e di sicurezza di Extron, cod. articolo
68‑290‑01, sul sito web di Extron, www.extron.com.
I
Copyright
© 2019 Extron Electronics. All rights reserved. www.extron.com
Trademarks
All trademarks mentioned in this guide are the properties of their respective owners.
The following registered trademarks (®), registered service marks (SM), and trademarks (TM) are the property of RGB Systems, Inc. or
Extron Electronics (see the current list of trademarks on the Terms of Use page at www.extron.com):
Registered Trademarks (®)
Extron, Cable Cubby, ControlScript, CrossPoint, DTP, eBUS, EDID Manager, EDID Minder, Flat Field, FlexOS, Glitch Free. Global
Configurator, Global Scripter, GlobalViewer, Hideaway, HyperLane, IP Intercom, IP Link, Key Minder, LinkLicense, LockIt, MediaLink,
MediaPort, NetPA, PlenumVault, PoleVault, PowerCage, PURE3, Quantum, Show Me, SoundField, SpeedMount, SpeedSwitch,
StudioStation, System INTEGRATOR, TeamWork, TouchLink, V‑Lock, VideoLounge, VN‑Matrix, VoiceLift, WallVault, WindoWall, XPA, XTP,
XTP Systems, and ZipClip
Registered Service Mark(SM) : S3 Service Support Solutions
Trademarks (™)
AAP, AFL (Accu‑RATE Frame Lock), ADSP (Advanced Digital Sync Processing), Auto‑Image, AVEdge, CableCover, CDRS (Class D
Ripple Suppression), Codec Connect, DDSP (Digital Display Sync Processing), DMI (Dynamic Motion Interpolation), Driver Configurator,
DSP Configurator, DSVP (Digital Sync Validation Processing), eLink, EQIP, Everlast, FastBite, Flex55, FOX, FOXBOX, IP Intercom
HelpDesk, MAAP, MicroDigital, Opti‑Torque, PendantConnect, ProDSP, QS‑FPC (QuickSwitch Front Panel Controller), Room Agent,
Scope‑Trigger, ShareLink, SIS, Simple Instruction Set, Skew‑Free, SpeedNav, Triple‑Action Switching, True4K, Vector 4K , WebShare,
XTRA, and ZipCaddy
FCC Class A Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. The Class A limits provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause interference. This interference must be corrected at the expense of the user.
ATTENTION:
• The Twisted Pair Extension technology works with unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
or shielded twisted pair (STP) cables; but to ensure FCC Class A and CE
compliance, STP cables and STP Connectors are required.
• La technologie extension paires torsadées fonctionne avec les câbles paires
torsadées blindées (UTP) ou non blindées (STP). Afin de s’assurer de la
compatibilité entre FCC Classe A et CE, les câbles STP et les connecteurs STP
sont nécessaires.
NOTES:
• This unit was tested with shielded I/O cables on the peripheral devices. Shielded
cables must be used to ensure compliance with FCC emissions limits.
• For more information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF
compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the Extron Safety and
Regulatory Compliance Guide on the Extron website.
Battery Notice
This product contains a battery. Do not open the unit to replace the battery. If the
battery needs replacing, return the entire unit to Extron (for the correct address, see the
Extron Warranty section on the last page of this guide).
CAUTION: Risk of explosion. Do not replace the battery with an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
ATTENTION : Risque d’explosion. Ne pas remplacer la pile par le mauvais type de
pile. Débarrassez-vous des piles usagées selon le mode d’emploi.
Conventions Used in this Guide
Notifications
The following notifications are used in this guide:
CAUTION: Risk of minor personal injury.
ATTENTION : Risque de blessure mineure.
ATTENTION:
• Risk of property damage.
• Risque de dommages matériels.
NOTE: A note draws attention to important information.
TIP: A tip provides a suggestion to make working with the application easier.
Software Commands
Commands are written in the fonts shown here:
^AR Merge Scene,,0p1 scene 1,1 ^B 51 ^W^C.0
[01] R 0004 00300 00400 00800 00600 [02] 35 [17] [03]
E X! *X1&* X2)* X2#* X2! CE}
NOTE: For commands and examples of computer or device responses used in
this guide, the character “0” is used for the number zero and “O” is the capital
letter “o.”
Computer responses and directory paths that do not have variables are written in the font
shown here:
Reply from 208.132.180.48: bytes=32 times=2ms TTL=32
C:\Program Files\Extron
Variables are written in slanted form as shown here:
ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx —t
SOH R Data STX Command ETB ETX
Selectable items, such as menu names, menu options, buttons, tabs, and field names are
written in the font shown here:
From the File menu, select New.
Click the OK button.
Specifications Availability
Product specifications are available on the Extron website, www.extron.com.
Extron Glossary of Terms
A glossary of terms is available at http://www.extron.com/technology/glossary.
aspx.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Introduction
iii
Contents
Introduction................................................. 1
About this Guide................................................... 1
About the DMP 128 FlexPlus................................ 1
Features............................................................... 1
Application Diagram............................................. 3
Installation................................................... 4
DMP 128 FlexPlus Models.................................... 4
Mounting.............................................................. 4
Rear Panel Features and Cabling.......................... 5
Front Panel Features............................................. 8
Hardware Reset Modes........................................ 9
Mode 1 — Firmware Reset............................... 9
Mode 4 — IP Reset.......................................... 9
Mode 5 — Factory Default Reset...................... 9
DSP Configurator Software........................ 10
Downloading and Installing DSP Configurator..... 10
Accessing the DSP Configurator Help File.......... 11
DSP Configurator Main Workspace.................... 11
Menu Bar........................................................... 12
File................................................................. 12
Edit................................................................. 13
View............................................................... 13
Tools............................................................... 14
Window.......................................................... 15
Help............................................................... 16
Macros Drop-Down........................................ 16
Presets Drop-Down........................................ 16
DSP Configurator Status Panel....................... 17
Live and Emulate Panel.................................. 17
DSP Configurator Inputs..................................... 20
Mic/Line Inputs................................................... 20
Naming an Input Channel............................... 21
Input Building Blocks...................................... 21
Input Processing................................................. 23
Input Gain Block............................................. 23
Input Filter Block............................................. 24
Input AEC Block............................................. 27
Input Dynamics Blocks................................... 30
Input Delay Block............................................ 35
Input Ducking Block....................................... 36
Input Automix Block....................................... 38
Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block............................. 40
Aux Inputs.......................................................... 41
Renaming an Aux Input.................................. 41
Aux Input Building Blocks............................... 42
Aux Input Processing.......................................... 42
Aux Input Gain Block...................................... 42
Aux Input Filter Block...................................... 44
Aux Input Dynamics Block.............................. 45
Aux Input Ducking Block................................ 45
Aux Input Automix Block................................ 45
Aux Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block...................... 45
Virtual Returns.................................................... 45
Renaming a Virtual Return.............................. 46
Virtual Return Building Blocks......................... 46
Virtual Return Processing .................................. 47
Virtual Return Feedback Suppressor Block..... 47
Virtual Return Filter Block................................ 51
Virtual Return Dynamics Block........................ 51
Virtual Return Delay Block.............................. 51
Virtual Return Pre-Mixer Gain Block................ 51
Expansion and AT Inputs.................................... 51
Renaming an Expansion or AT Input............... 51
Expansion and AT Inputs Overview................. 52
Expansion and AT Inputs Processing.............. 52
Mix-Points.......................................................... 53
Mix-Point Dialog Box...................................... 55
Mix-Point Context Menu................................. 56
DSP Configurator Outputs.................................. 56
Outputs.............................................................. 57
Naming an Output.......................................... 57
Output Building Blocks................................... 57
Output Processing.............................................. 58
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Contents
iv
Output Trim Block........................................... 59
Output Delay Block......................................... 59
Output Filter Block.......................................... 59
Output Dynamics Block.................................. 59
Output Attenuation Block............................... 60
Aux Outputs....................................................... 61
Naming an Aux Output................................... 61
Aux Output Processing....................................... 61
Aux Output Trim Block.................................... 62
Aux Output Filter Block................................... 62
Aux Output Dynamics Block........................... 62
Aux Output Gain Block................................... 62
Expansion Outputs............................................. 63
Naming an Expansion Output......................... 63
Expansion Output Processing............................. 64
Expansion Output Trim Block.......................... 64
Expansion Output Delay Block........................ 64
Expansion Output Filter Block......................... 64
Expansion Output Dynamics Block................. 64
Expansion Output Attenuation Block.............. 65
Virtual Send Bus................................................. 65
Configuration Tools.................................... 67
Presets............................................................... 67
Methods for Marking Items............................. 68
Configuring Presets........................................ 68
Groups............................................................... 69
Configuring Groups........................................ 70
Digital I/O .......................................................... 72
Configuring Digital I/O..................................... 73
Players............................................................... 75
Configuring Players......................................... 76
Macros............................................................... 78
Configuring a Macro....................................... 79
Configure USB Audio......................................... 82
Selecting USB Audio Channel
Configuration................................................. 82
Creating Groups............................................. 83
Assigning USB Control Groups....................... 83
Configure Internal Triggers.................................. 84
Configuring an Internal Trigger........................ 84
Deleting an Internal Trigger............................. 84
Testing a Trigger............................................. 84
Pushing Internal Triggers to a Host Device...... 85
Device Manager................................................. 85
Managing Devices in Device Manager............. 86
Connect to or Disconnect from Device............... 87
Firmware Loader................................................ 88
Downloading Firmware Updates..................... 88
Organize Building Blocks.................................... 91
Device Settings.................................................. 92
Unit Info.......................................................... 92
IP Settings ..................................................... 93
Passwords .................................................... 93
Serial Settings ................................................ 94
Date/Time ..................................................... 94
USB Audio...................................................... 95
Dante Device ................................................. 97
Options.............................................................. 98
Expansion Bus................................................... 98
Connecting the EXP Ports.............................. 98
Phone Dialer..................................................... 100
Placing a Call with the Phone Dialer.............. 101
Receiving a Call with the Phone Dialer.......... 101
Audio Control Panels (ACP) ..................... 103
ACP Panel Types.............................................. 103
Panel ID #......................................................... 104
ACP Panel Button Control Types...................... 104
Fixed............................................................ 104
Follow Selector............................................. 105
Selector-Vol/Mute (Selector).......................... 105
Button Labels............................................... 105
Using Multiple ACP Panels............................... 105
Configuration Examples.................................... 105
ACP 100 Configuration Example................... 106
ACP 106 Style Configuration Example.......... 108
Saving and Pushing ACP Configurations...... 111
Dante Controller....................................... 112
Overview.......................................................... 112
Downloading and Installing Dante Controller..... 113
Configuring the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Dante
Controller......................................................... 113
Device Name................................................ 113
Receiver and Transmitter Names.................. 114
Dante Controller Naming Conventions.......... 114
Renaming the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Dante
Controller..................................................... 114
Renaming a Receiver or Transmitter............. 116
Finding a Dante Device IP Address............... 118
Physical Dante Network Setup......................... 119
Redundant Configuration.............................. 119
Dante Controller Operation............................... 121
Dante Transmitters and Receivers................. 121
Dante Routing Operation.............................. 121
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Contents
v
Routing Devices........................................... 121
Sending SIS Commands to Dante Audio
Interface Devices through the DMP.............. 123
Disconnecting Inputs from Outputs............... 124
Dante Troubleshooting...................................... 124
Simplifying the Network for
Troubleshooting........................................... 124
Troubleshooting the Network Interface.......... 125
Restarting Dante Controller........................... 126
Remote Communication and Control........ 127
Connection Options.......................................... 127
RS-232 Port................................................. 128
LAN Port...................................................... 128
USB Config Port........................................... 129
Verbose Modes............................................ 129
Host-to-Device Communications...................... 130
DMP 128 FlexPlus-initiated Messages.......... 130
SIS Overview.................................................... 131
Using the Command and Response
Tables.......................................................... 131
Symbol Definitions........................................ 131
Error Responses............................................... 132
Simple Control Port Commands....................... 132
Command and Response Table Sections......... 133
Command and Response Table for Basic SIS
Commands................................................. 133
DSP SIS Commands.................................... 146
Symbol Definitions........................................ 146
Special Characters....................................... 147
Command and Response Table for DSP SIS
Commands................................................. 148
Command and Response Table for VoIP SIS
Commands................................................. 154
Object ID (OID) Number Tables......................... 156
Input Path OIDs............................................ 156
Output Path OIDs......................................... 157
Automixer OIDs............................................ 159
Mix-point OIDs............................................. 161
Web Pages............................................... 171
DMP 128 FlexPlus Web Page .......................... 171
Accessing the Embedded Web Page............ 171
Using the Web Page..................................... 172
DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP Web Page................... 174
Accessing the Embedded VoIP Web Page.... 174
Using the VoIP Web Page............................. 175
Special Characters........................................... 185
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Contents
vi
Introduction
This section describes this user guide and the DMP 128 FlexPlus. The following topics are
covered:
•
About this Guide
•
About the DMP 128 FlexPlus
•
Features
•
Application Diagram
About this Guide
This guide contains installation, configuration, and operating information for the Extron
DMP 128 FlexPlus ProDSP Digital Audio Matrix Processor. In this guide, the DMP 128
FlexPlus may also be referred to as “DMP 128,” “the mixer,” or “device”.
About the DMP 128 FlexPlus
The DMP 128 FlexPlus series of compact Dante Digital Matrix Processors features twelve
FlexInput channels with full DSP, including AEC, and Dante connectivity, in only a half rack
space. The DMP 128 FlexPlus has an extensive mix matrix, a USB audio interface, and
analog compatibility. The V-model includes up to eight VoIP lines. The DMP 128 FlexPlus
also features an ACP bus for audio control panels, an expansion port for bidirectional digital
audio connection with a DTP CrossPoint or another DMP, eight audio file players, and
configurable macros.
Features
•
Two models with 60 total inputs and 32 total outputs — The DMP 128 FlexPlus
offers signal routing and management for a wide range of sound system applications:
•
Inputs: 48 Digital via Dante or Expansion Bus, 4 Analog balanced/unbalanced mic/
line level, 8 Aux for USB or VoIP
•
Outputs: 16 Digital via Dante or Expansion Bus, 8 Analog balanced/unbalanced
line level, 8 Aux for USB, VoIP or File Players
•
48x24 Dante audio networking with Dante Domain Manager and AES67 support
— Dante audio networking provides scalability for creating larger audio matrixes over a
local area network using standard protocols. A built in two port Gigabit switch can be
configured to support primary and redundant Dante audio networks.
•
Twelve channels of AEC - acoustic echo cancellation — The DMP 128 FlexPlus
includes twelve independent channels of high performance AEC, as well as selectable
noise cancellation. Extron AEC features advanced algorithms that deliver fast echo
canceler convergence for optimal intelligibility in situations that challenge AEC
performance.
•
All models include a USB Audio interface, providing up to four channels of
digital audio sends and returns — Support for USB Audio simplifies implementation
of systems with either soft-codec conferencing or computer-based audio and enables
use of the same interface for both small- and large-scale systems.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Introduction
1
•
V-model includes up to eight VoIP lines that support generic Session Initiation
Protocol - SIP 2.0 connectivity per RFC 3261 — The DMP FlexPlus C V AT is
compatible with select VoIP systems and can be used for a single VoIP line or as a VoIP
farm for up to eight rooms.
•
Compact half rack size — Allows more input and output channels, with more
processing power, to be installed in less space.
•
FlexInput capability on main inputs — All twelve main inputs offer FlexInput
capability to select a Dante channel, expansion input, or one of the four mic/line inputs.
This allows incorporating the full range of DSP capabilities, including AEC, for incoming
Dante channels.
•
Optional ACP Series audio control panels provide intuitive audio system control
— Direct interface with the DMP 128 FlexPlus offers flexible audio control for systems
that do not require a full control system.
•
Digital I/O ports for remote control or feedback — Two digital input ports and two
digital output ports are provided, so that the DMP 128 FlexPlus can be programmed to
sense and then respond to external triggers such as mic activation, muting, and recall of
presets.
•
Macros allow the sequencing of commands that can be sent to the local device
or external devices via the LAN port — A single DMP 128 FlexPlus can act as the
central interface from a control system, sending commands to other DMP, AXI AT, and
DTP CrossPoint devices.
•
Aux inputs and outputs can be individually configured as audio file players,
USB Audio, or in the V-model, VoIP lines — Audio file players can be allocated to
any aux input and used to play back prerecorded content. USB Audio and VoIP can be
allocated to any aux input and any aux output. In these cases, the aux inputs function
like returns and the aux outputs function like sends. For USB audio, that would be
sends and returns to/from a room PC running a software codec, and VoIP would be
sends and returns to/from the central VoIP PBX.
•
Advanced audio processing on all eight analog outputs and all 16 direct Dante/
Expansion outputs — Up to 24 speaker zones can be implemented on one DMP
128 FlexPlus with full processing for each zone, making it ideal for full mix-minus
implementations.
•
Extensive mix matrixing in every DMP 128 FlexPlus allows all inputs to be
discretely routed to any or all outputs — Allows all 12 main inputs, 8 aux inputs,
48 Dante inputs and 16 virtual bus returns to be discretely routed to any or all of the 8
analog outputs, 4 aux outputs, 24 Dante outputs and the 16 virtual bus sends.
•
16 virtual processing loops allow for great flexibility in sub-mixing and
processing — Processing common to many inputs can be applied using a single
virtual channel.
•
Up to eight audio file players can be used to play back audio files for system
set-up or as part of the system design — Use the provided pink noise, white
noise, and sine wave files, or import your own WAV, MP3, WMA, AIFF, AAC, or RAW
files. Supported file formats are automatically converted to 24-bit, 48 kHz RAW for
approximately 20 minutes of playback time and saved to the onboard storage.
•
Low latency — Powerful DSP chips maximize performance, resulting in latency
that is very low, from input to output, regardless of the number of active channels or
processes. While latency increases in channels with AEC enabled, and marginally with
the automixer, overall latency remains low. This keeps audio in sync with video, and
prevents distractions to presenters or performers resulting from delayed live audio.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Introduction
2
Application Diagram
Ceiling
Audio
Ceiling Mic Array
Extron
SF 26CT
(8 mic channels)
Full-Range
Ceiling Speakers
Ethernet
LAN
Credenza
Ethernet/PoE
3
4
1
1
2
3
2
4
5
7
6
8
I/O
2
2 (SEC)
+V +S -S G
RS-232
Tx Rx G
LAN/VoIP
1 (PRI)
REMOTE
IN G O IN G O
ACP
Table
Microphones
1
AT
POWER
12V
2.0 A MAX
DMP EXP
INPUTS
Ethernet
OUTS
Conference Table
USB AUD
R
1
2
VoIP
Extron
DMP 128 FlexPlus
Digital Matrix Processor
CVAT
DMP EXP
WiFi
Extron
TLP Pro 1020T
Laptop
PC
DVD
HDMI
PC
Doc
Cam
VCR
Tuner
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
123
Volume
Tuner
On
USB Audio
USB Video
10" Tabletop
TouchLink Pro
Touchpanel
Display
1 2 3 4
Channel
Presets
Off
Mute
Mute
Room
Control
0
Screen
Lighting
9
Last
Camera
More
Presets
Enter
Audio
Control
System
Off
December 15, 2013 - 7:58 AM
Help
COM
HDMI
Laptop
INPUTS
1
2 3 4 5
1
2 3 4
LOGO
CONTROL
I/O
eBUS
S
LIMIT
RTS
IR/S
CTS
1
I/O
RELAYS
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
Tx
6 7 8
SELECT
ENTER
PRESET
VIEW
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
Rx
OVER
1
2
3
MIC VOLUME
2
VOLUME
CONFIG
OUTPUTS
DTP CROSSPOINT 4K SERIES
DIGITAL PRESENTATION SWITCHER
Extron
DTP CrossPoint 82 4K IPCP MA
Scaling Presentation Matrix Switcher
Flat Panel Display
Ethernet
HDMI
Ethernet
LAN
Extron
DTP T USW 233
Transmitter
Cat 5/5e/6/7
STATUS
AUTO
SWITCH
1
2
3
CONFIG
1
2
3
SIGNAL
HDCP
MODE
NORMAL
AUTO
DTP T USW 233
Ethernet
LAN
Figure 1.
DMP 128 FlexPlus Application Diagram
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Introduction
3
Installation
This section describes the installation of the DMP 128 FlexPlus and covers the following
topics:
•
DMP 128 FlexPlus Models
•
Mounting
•
Rear Panel Features and Cabling
•
Front Panel Features
•
Hardware Reset Modes
DMP 128 FlexPlus Models
Model
Description
DMP 128 FlexPlus C AT
Dante Digital Matrix Processor with 12 AEC
DMP 128 FlexPlus C V AT
Dante Digital Matrix Processor with 12 AEC and VoIP
Mounting
The 1U high, half rack width, 9.5 inch deep DMP 128 FlexPlus mounts in the following
manners:
Rack mounting — Attach the DMP 128 FlexPlus to a standard 19-inch rack shelf.
The following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) guidelines pertain to the installation of the
DMP 128 FlexPlus in a rack:
•
•
Reduced air flow — Install the equipment in the rack so that the amount of air
flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
•
Mechanical loading — Mount the equipment in the racks so that uneven
mechanical loading does not create a hazardous condition.
•
Circuit overloading — When connecting the equipment to the supply circuit,
consider the effect that circuit overloading might have on overcurrent protection
and supply wiring. Consider equipment nameplate ratings when addressing this
concern.
•
Reliable earthing (grounding) — Maintain reliable grounding of rack-mounted
equipment. Pay particular attention to power supply connections other than direct
connections to the branch circuit (such as the use of power strips).
•
Under-furniture mounting — Mount the DMP 128 FlexPlus under the surface of a
desk, table, or podium.
•
Free-standing — Attach the four rubber feet provided with the device to the bottom of
the DMP 128 FlexPlus in the four corners and place the unit on furniture as desired.
NOTE: To mount the DMP 128 FlexPlus using an Extron mounting kit, see the
instructions provided with the kit.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Installation
4
e
DMP 128 FlexPlus
DIGITAL MATRIX PROCESSOR
B
A
C
D
E
Rear Panel Features and Cabling
I
J
K
A
4
1
1
2
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
OUTS
3
I/O
2
2 (SEC)
B
C
+V +S -S G
RS-232
Tx Rx G
D
A
R
1
E
A Power Input
B EXP Port
C AT Ports
D ACP Port
E RS-232 Port
F LAN Ports
Figure 2.
USB AUD
LAN/VoIP
1 (PRI)
REMOTE
ACP
IN G O IN G O
AT
POWER
12V
2.0 A MAX
1
DMP EXP
INPUTS
anel
2
F
CVAT
G
H
G USB Audio Port
H Reset Button and LED
I Mic/Line Inputs
J Digital I/O Ports
K Line Outputs
DMP 128 FlexPlus Rear Panel
Power Input — Connect the included external 2-pole captive screw power supply (see
the figure below for power supply wiring information).
NOTE: If a power supply is not provided, use a UL Listed power supply with rated
output 12 VDC, minimum 2.0 A, and marked “Class 2” or “LPS”.
POWER
12V
2.0A MAX
Rear Panel
Power Receptacle
DC Power Cord
Captive Screw
Connector
3/16"
(5 mm) Max.
Ground all
Devices
G Ground
+12 VDC input
Figure 3.
External Power Supply
(12 VDC, 2.0 A max.)
Power Input Wiring
B
EXP Port — One RJ-45 port allows two units to be connected via a shielded CAT 6
cable to form a larger matrix system (1 foot cable included). Any Extron device with EXP
capability can exchange audio with a DMP 128 FlexPlus via the EXP port.
C
AT Ports — Two RJ-45 ports form a Gigabit switch for use with a Dante network. The
AT ports use Dante protocol for digital audio transport (AT) and allow the DMP 128
FlexPlus to connect to a Dante audio network to form a larger matrix (Dante Controller
on page 111). The 2-port switch can be configured as two primary and secondary
ports for redundant Dante configurations. In redundant configuration, audio traffic is
duplicated. Port 1 is the primary port (PRI) and Port 2 is the secondary switch (SEC)
(see Redundant Configuration on page 118).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Installation
5
D
ACP Port — Use a 4-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connector to connect an ACP
control device for configuration via DSP Configurator (Audio Control Panels (ACP) on
page 102).
+V
+S
-S
G
Figure 4.
E
+12 VDC
+ Signal
- Signal
Ground
ACP Port Connector Wiring
RS-232 Port — Use a 3-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connector to connect the host
RS-232 cable for bidirectional RS-232 (±5V) serial control (see figure 5 below for wiring).
The default baud rate is 38400.
REMOTE
Connected RS-232
Device Pins
Receive
Transmit
Ground
Figure 5.
F
RS-232
Tx Rx G
RS-232 Wiring Example
LAN Ports — One (non-V-model) or two (V-model) RJ-45 ports provide a Gigabit
network connection for control and VoIP traffic. The host PC or control system and the
DMP 128 FlexPlus must be connected to the same network. Two LEDs indicate status.
NOTE: Only the DMP 128 FlexPlus V-model has two LAN/VoIP ports. The Non-Vmodel only has a single LAN port.
LAN 1 defaults:
IP Address
192.168.254.254
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
DHCP
OFF
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
DHCP
OFF
LAN 2 defaults:
IP Address
192.168.1.254
There are three ways the dual LAN ports can be configured on DMP 128 FlexPlus
V-models:
1. Control and VoIP traffic on one LAN port — Both control and VoIP traffic can be
transported via a single LAN port.
NOTE: By default, control and VoIP traffic are both transported on LAN 1.
2. Control and VoIP traffic on one LAN port using a VLAN — Both control and
VoIP traffic can be transported via a single physical LAN port while utilizing a VLAN
for VoIP traffic.
3. Control and VoIP traffic on separate LAN ports — Control and VoIP traffic can
be transported on separate LAN ports with unique IP configurations.
G
USB Audio Port — One mini USB type B port connects to a computer and allows the
DMP 128 FlexPlus to function as a configurable USB audio interface with a Windows or
Mac computer. Available sample rates are 48 kHz/16-bit (see Configure USB Audio
on page 82).
H
Reset Button and LED —The reset button returns the DMP 128 FlexPlus to different
tiers of default states. When using the reset button, the LED blinks to signify the different
reset modes (Hardware Reset Modes on page 9). When not displaying reset
modes, the LED operates as a power indicator, matching the front panel power LED.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Installation
6
I
Mic/Line Inputs — Use 6-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connectors to connect 4
balanced or unbalanced microphone or mono line level sources (see figure 6 below).
Inputs 1 through 4 provide phantom power and AEC.
Tip
Sleeve
Jumper
Tip
Sleeve
Jumper
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
Balanced Input
Unbalanced Input
6-pole Audio INPUT Wiring
Figure 6.
6-pole Audio Input Wiring
ATTENTION:
• Condenser microphones require phantom power.
• Les microphones électrostatiques nécessitent une alimentation fantôme.
• Dynamic microphones do not need power.
• Les microphones dynamiques n’ont pas besoin d’alimentation.
• When a line level source is connected, be certain the +48 V phantom power is
off (cleared).
• Lorsqu’une source de niveau ligne est connectée, soyez certain que
l’alimentation fantôme +48 V est débranchée (enlevée).
J
Digital I/O Ports — Connect one 6-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connector. These
configurable digital input and output ports are designed to connect to microphones with
logic circuitry for mic mute and tally back functionality. Each port provides a common
ground (Digital I/O on page 72).
2
K
1
IN G O IN G O
Figure 7.
Digital I/O
Connector
6-pole
Captive Screw
Connector
Line Outputs — Use 6-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connectors to connect up to eight
mono balanced or unbalanced line level devices or four stereo devices (see figure 8
below).
Tip
NO Ground Here
Sleeve
Tip
NO Ground Here
Sleeve
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
Balanced Output
Figure 8.
Unbalanced Output
6-pole Audio OUTPUT Wiring
6-pole Audio Output Wiring
ATTENTION:
• For unbalanced audio, connect the sleeves to the ground contact. DO NOT
connect the sleeves to the negative (–) contacts.
• Pour l’audio asymétrique, connectez les manchons au contact au sol. Ne PAS
connecter les manchons aux contacts négatifs (–).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Installation
7
1 (PRI)
+V +S -S G
2 (SEC)
REMOT
ACP
AT
DMP EX
2.0 A MAX
RS-232
R
Tx Rx G
LAN
C AT
Front Panel Features
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
ACTIVITY
EXP
USB
CONFIG
e
LAN 1
LAN 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CLIP
SIGNAL
C
D
E
A Power LED
B USB Config Port
C Activity Indicator LEDs
I
J
K
DMP 128 FlexPlus Front Panel
Power
LED
— Blinks during1 boot2 up and
lights
steadily
when the
DMP
128
FlexPlus
is
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
7
6
8
operational.
B
G O IN G O
USB Config Port — One INUSB
mini type B port is used for configuration. The USB
USB AUD
config port can also be used for firmware updates.
C
Activity Indicator LEDs — These green activity LEDs indicate port activity on the
Tx Rx G
+V +S -S G
DMP 128
FlexPlus:
1
1 (PRI)
2 (SEC)
CVAT
2
B
D
RS-232
LAN/VoIP
REMOTE
I/O
2
OUTS
A
•
A
D Input Indicator LEDs
E Output Indicator LEDs
ACP
1
AT
DMP EXP
INPUTS
Figure 9.
POWER
12V
2.0 A MAX
DMP 128 FlexPlus
DIGITAL MATRIX PROCESSOR
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLIP
SIGNAL
R
EXP Indicator LEDs —
•
D
F
H
On —CThe unit is connected
to a E
second EXP non-AT
device andGis configured
as the primary unit.
•
Blinking — The unit is not connected to a second device.
•
USB Activity Indicator LED —Blinks to indicate audio streaming over USB.
•
LAN Activity Indicator LEDs — Blinks to indicate rear panel LAN port activity.
Input Indicator LEDs — Stacked green and red LEDs display input signal presence
and input signal clipping.
The green signal presence LED varies in brightness, corresponding to the real-time
input signal level. It lights at -60 dBFS and increases in brightness until signal level
reaches -3 dBFS. When the signal reaches or exceeds -3 dBFS, the red clip LED lights.
The clip LED remains lit for 200 ms after receiving the clip signal.
E
Output Indicator LEDs — Stacked red and green LEDs display output signal
presence and output signal clipping.
Output indicator LEDs function identically to the input indicator LEDs (see D above).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Installation
8
Hardware Reset Modes
NOTE: The reset modes listed below close all IP connections, Telnet connections, and
sockets.
Mode 1 — Firmware Reset
Hold the Reset button while applying power to restore the unit firmware back to the default
factory firmware. This recovers a unit that has incorrect code or updated firmware running.
All user files and settings are maintained.
Mode 4 — IP Reset
With power on, press and hold the Reset button until the reset LED blinks twice
(~6 seconds). Release the button and, within 1 second, press it again to reset all IP address
settings to factory default.
The following changes take place:
•
ARP program capability is enabled
•
Sets IP addresses for LAN 1 port back to factory default (192.168.254.254)
•
Sets subnet masks for LAN 1 port back to factory default (255.255.255.0)
•
Sets gateways for LAN port back to factory default
•
Resets LAN 2 settings (V-models only.
IP address: 192.168.1.254; Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0; Gateway: 0.0.0.0)
•
Turns DHCP off for LAN 1 port (and LAN 2 port on V-models only)
•
Sets digital I/O port mapping back to factory default
If a second momentary press does not occur within 1 second, Mode 4 is exited.
Mode 5 — Factory Default Reset
With power on, press and hold the Reset button until the reset LED blinks 3 times
(~9 seconds). Release the button and, within 1 second, press it again to return the
DMP 128 FlexPlus to factory default conditions.
The following changes take place:
•
Sets all IP settings back to factory default (see Mode 4 above) Mix-points are set to unit
gain (0 dBFS) and the following connections are made
•
Input 1 is routed to output 1
•
Input 2 is routed to output 2
•
Input 3 is routed to output 3
•
Input 4 is routed to output 4
•
Input 5 is routed to output 5
•
Input 6 is routed to output 6
•
Input 7 is routed to output 7
•
Input 8 is routed to output 8
•
All audio inputs are set to unity gain
•
All outputs are unmuted and set to unity gain
•
Any inserted or active DSP is removed
•
All preset and group master memory is cleared
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Installation
9
DSP Configurator
Software
The DMP 128 FlexPlus has no front panel hardware controls. To configure and operate
the DMP 128 FlexPlus, use a PC running Microsoft® Windows® 7 or newer and Extron
DSP Configurator software. This section describes Extron DSP Configurator software and
covers the following topics:
• Downloading and Installing DSP Configurator • Expansion and AT Inputs
• Accessing the DSP Configurator Help File
• Mix-Points
• DSP Configurator Main Workspace
• DSP Configurator Outputs
• Menu Bar
• Outputs
• DSP Configurator Inputs
• Output Processing
• Mic/Line Inputs
• Aux Outputs
• Input Processing
• Aux Output Processing
• Aux Inputs
• Expansion Outputs
• Aux Input Processing
• Expansion Output Processing
• Virtual Returns
• Virtual Send Bus
• Virtual Return Processing
Downloading and Installing DSP Configurator
1. From www.extron.com, hover over the Download tab at the top of the page.
2. From the Featured Software list, select DSP Configurator Software.
3. From the DSP Configurator Software product page, click the blue Download button.
4. Select Run to run the DSP Configurator installer. Select Save to save the install file to run
at a later time.
5. To run DSP Configurator from the default install location, click
Start> Programs> Extron Electronics> DSP Configurator> DSP Configurator.
6. From the DSP Configurator splash screen drop-down menu (figure 10, 1 below),
select the model of DMP 128 FlexPlus being connected to the host PC and click
OK (2).
Figure 10.
DSP Configurator Splash Screen
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
10
Accessing the DSP Configurator Help File
DSP Configurator comes loaded with a context-sensitive help file that can be accessed by
clicking the help icon (
) in the top right corner of any dialog box in DSP Configurator.
Alternatively, click Help > Contents in the menu bar at the top of the main workspace,
or press <F1> on your keyboard. This help file contains detailed procedures and further
instruction on all DSP Configurator features.
DSP Configurator Main Workspace
The DSP Configurator main workspace can be divided up into four main sections (see
figure 11). Each section contains various functions to configure the DMP 128 FlexPlus.
Due to the large number of inputs and outputs available on the DMP 128 FlexPlus, not all
channels can be viewed at the same time in a single window. Use the expand and collapse
buttons (
) next to the input and output group names to show or hide input and output
groups and their corresponding mix matrices. If necessary, scroll through the window by
using the mouse wheel or the scroll bar at the right side of the DSP Configurator main
workspace.
1 Menu Bar on the next page
2 Mic/Line Inputs on page 20
Figure 11.
3 Mix-Points on page 53
4 Outputs on page 57
DSP Configurator Main Workspace
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
11
Menu Bar
File
Figure 12.
File Menu
1
New — Opens a new configuration file. This option is only available in Emulate mode
(Emulate Mode on page 17). If the current configuration has not been saved,
the Save dialog box opens and asks to save the current configuration before a new
configuration is opened. Click Yes to save the current configuration. Click No to delete
the current configuration and open the new configuration. Click Cancel to return to the
current configuration.
2
Open — Opens an existing configuration or template file. When selected, the Browse
dialog box opens to search for saved configuration or template files. Double‑click a
configuration or template file to load it.
NOTE: Configuration files have a .EDC file extension and template files have a .EDCT
file extension.
3
Save — Saves the current configuration to a configuration file. If this is the first time the
configuration is being saved, the Save Configuration As... dialog box opens. Enter a
name and save location for the configuration file.
TIP:
It is best to create and save configuration files while in Emulate mode.
4
Save As — Saves the current configuration file under a new name and location or as a
template file. When selected, the Save Configuration As... dialog box opens.
5
Export Single Device — Saves the currently selected device in Device Manager as
a configuration file. This function is used to save an individual device when there are
multiple devices listed in the Device Manager (Device Manager on page 85).
6
Backup — Recalls and transfers all partial presets of a DMP 128 to the configuration
file or template file within DSP Configurator.
7
Convert Device to... — Select a model of DMP 128 FlexPlus to which the current
configuration file will be converted. After a conversion target model is selected, the
Device Conversion dialog opens. For more information, refer to the DSP Configurator
help file by clicking the context sensitive help (?) button in the dialog.
8
Recent Files — Lists the five most recently opened configuration files. These files can
be selected and loaded into DSP Configurator.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
12
9
Exit — Closes DSP Configurator. If the current configuration has not been saved, the
Save dialog box opens and prompts the user to save the current configuration before
closing the software. Click Yes to save the file. Click No to exit the application without
saving. Click Cancel to return to the main workspace and keep the software running.
Edit
Figure 13.
Edit Menu
1
Cut — Removes the configuration of selected elements in the workspace to be pasted
to other elements.
2
Copy — Copies the configuration of selected elements in the workspace to be pasted
to other elements.
3
Paste — Applies the cut or copied configuration of elements to the selected elements
in the workspace.
View
Figure 14.
1
View Menu
Meter Bridge — Opens a meter bridge to view input and output activity. The meter
bridge is a floating window, allowing use of the DSP Configurator workspace while
simultaneously monitoring input and output activity.
NOTE: The meter bridge is only available in Live mode with a TCP/IP connection.
2
Re-enable All Dialogs — This option re‑enables all dialog boxes that no longer
appear based on user selection (certain dialog boxes that appear are user-defeatable by
selecting a checkbox that reads Do Not Show This Dialog Again).
3
Group Controls — Opens the Group Controls dialog box to access existing group
controls and add new groups.
4
AT Meters — Opens a dialog box to select AT devices on the network. Double-click a
device to open a meter bridge dialog box that displays AT transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx)
channel levels for that device. The dialog box is a floating window, allowing use of the
main workspace while simultaneously monitoring AT levels.
5
Show All Channels — Individual channels can be hidden by user selection. This
provides options for the user to select which input and output groups are visible in the
main workspace.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
13
Tools
Figure 15.
Tools Menu
1 Presets — Contains a submenu to mark and clear elements in the main workspace as
well as an option to save marked elements to a preset (Presets on page 67).
2 Configure Groups — Opens the Configure
Groups dialog box to create, edit, and
delete Gain, Mute, Bass, Treble, and Loudness groups (Groups on page 69).
3 Configure Digital I/O — Opens the Configure
Digital I/O dialog box to assign
actions and modes to the digital inputs and outputs (Digital I/O on page 72).
4 Configure Players — Opens the Configure
Players dialog box to upload audio files
and assign them to players. Player control options are also found in the dialog box
(Players on page 75).
5 Configure ACP Panels — Opens the Configure
ACPs dialog box to configure Extron
Audio Control Panel interfaces (Audio Control Panels (ACP) on page 102).
6 Configure Macros — Opens the Configure
Macros dialog box for creating, editing,
and deleting macro functions (Macros on page 78).
7 Configure USB Audio — The Configure
USB Audio option opens the Configure
USB Control dialog. This dialog allows for Windows communication volume and mute
controls and Windows playback volume and mute controls to affect levels and mute
status in the connected Extron USB audio processor (Configure USB Control on
page 82).
8 Configure Internal Triggers — The Configure
Internal Triggers option opens the
Internal Trigger Setup dialog. This dialog allows for the configuration, testing, and
application of internal triggers (Configure Internal Triggers on page 84).
NOTE: The Configure Internal Triggers option is only available when connected
Live to a VoIP-enabled audio product with a TCP/IP connection.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
14
9
Connect/Disconnect from Device — When in Emulate mode, this reads
Connect to Device and opens the Connect to Device dialog box (Connect
to or Disconnect from Device on page 87). When in Live mode, this reads
Disconnect from Device and returns the software to Emulate mode.
¢
Device Manager — Opens the Device Manager dialog box (Device Manager on
page 85).
£
Issue RESET Command — Clears the DMP 128 FlexPlus of all processors and
other configuration settings. This command does not reset general settings such as IP
address.
¤
Firmware Loader — Opens the Firmware Loader application, if it is installed
(Firmware Loader on page 88). Visit www.extron.com to download the
software.
¥
Organize Building Blocks – Opens the Organize Building Blocks dialog box
(Organize Building Blocks on page 91).
¦
Device Settings — Opens the Device Settings dialog box to edit date and time, IP
address, DHCP status, and other settings (Device Settings on page 92).
§
Options – Opens the Options dialog box to configure DSP Configurator appearance,
default settings, DSP value defaults, and so on (Options on page 98).
¨
Network Audio Control — Opens the Dante Controller application by Audinate for
routing audio over a Dante network (Dante Controller on page 111).
©
Expansion Bus — Contains a submenu to assign the expansion ports to AT channels
33-48 (Expansion Bus on page 98).
ª
Phone Dialer — The Phone Dialer dialog box is used for DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP line
configuration and testing. DSP Configurator must be connected Live to a DMP 128
FlexPlus V-model in order for the Phone Dialer dialog to be opened (Phone Dialer on
page 100).
Window
Figure 16. Window Menu
1
Cascade — Organizes windows by cascading them in the same order they were
opened.
2
Close All Windows — Closes all open windows, leaving only the main workspace
visible. When all windows are closed, changes to parameters in the open windows are
saved before the window is closed.
3
List of Open Windows — Below the dividing line is a list of all open windows. Select
a window from the list to bring it into focus and to the forefront of the workspace.
Windows appear in the order they were opened.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
15
Help
Figure 17.
Help Menu
1
Contents — Opens the DSP Configurator Help file where detailed information about
DSP Configurator can be found.
2
3
Search — Opens the DSP Configurator Help file with the Search field in focus.
About — Opens a window displaying software version number, copyright information,
and part number for the installed copy of DSP Configurator. Click the Details button for
a list of advanced details, such as build number.
Macros Drop-Down
The Run Macro drop-down menu is available when connected to the DMP 128 FlexPlus in
Live mode. The drop-down list is unavailable in Emulate mode.
The Run Macro drop-down list allows the user to view and run all macros that have been
pushed to the device. The list of macros updates dynamically when a new macro is created.
Macros created in DSP Configurator that have not been pushed to the device appear in the
list with an asterisk to the right of the macro name. Only macros that have been pushed
to the device can be run from the Run Macro drop-down list (Macros on page 78 for
information on configuring macros).
Figure 18.
Macros Drop-Down Menu
Presets Drop-Down
The Presets drop‑down menu allows the user to view and apply presets saved in the
current configuration file or on a device connected in Live mode. Presets with an asterisk
next to them are on the DMP 128 FlexPlus, but not in the current configuration file. Run a
preset to load it into the configuration file. Alternatively, perform a backup to run all presets
and load them into the current configuration file (File on page 12).
Figure 19.
Presets Drop-Down Menu
After selecting a preset from the list, choose one of the following actions from the
DSP Configurator status panel:
Recall — Recalls the selected preset and applies settings to the main workspace.
Cancel — Cancels the preset recall and returns to the main workspace with the current
emulation or state intact.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
16
Delete — Deletes the selected preset from the configuration.
Figure 20.
Preset and Action Selection
DSP Configurator Status Panel
This panel displays the current status of DSP Configurator and shows when data is being
pushed to or pulled from the device. When the software is ready to perform actions, the
panel reads Ready.
Figure 21.
DSP Configurator Status Panel
Live and Emulate Panel
The Live and Emulate buttons allow users to switch between Live and Emulate mode and
displays transmit activity (Tx) and receive activity (Rx) when in Live mode.
Figure 22.
Mode Panel
Emulate Mode
While in Emulate mode, DSP Configurator is functioning in an “offline” state. Changes made
to the configuration file are not applied to a DMP 128 FlexPlus.
In Emulate mode, the user can create and configure the software as though a device was
connected, except for any actions that require direct connection to the device or information
that is stored only on the device. Once configuration is complete, the user can switch to
Live mode and apply the configuration to the device or save the configuration file to be
loaded onto one or multiple devices at a later time.
Creating configuration files in Emulate mode saves time by not requiring a device to be
connected or present in order for the bulk of DSP configuration to be completed.
NOTE: Not all menu options or actions are available in Emulate mode.
Live Mode
Enter Live mode to connect to a DMP 128 FlexPlus and push or pull configurations between
the device and host PC. In Live mode, changes made in DSP Configurator are directly
applied to the DMP 128 FlexPlus. Additionally, presets and macros can be created and
stored on the device.
When entering Live mode, the user is prompted with the Connect to device dialog box.
Connect to a DMP 128 FlexPlus in Live Mode
1. Click the Live button in the menu bar of DSP Configurator (see figure 23 , 1).
Alternatively, select Tools > Connect to Device or press <F6> on the keyboard. The
Connect to device dialog box opens.
Figure 23.
Live Button
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
17
2. Connect to the DMP 128 FlexPlus.
a. To connect via TCP/IP (recommended):
Click the TCP/IP tab in the dialog box. Enter the IP address of the device in the
Hostname or IP Address field. If necessary, enter the device password in the
Password field (see figure 24, a below).
b. To connect via USB:
Click the USB tab in the dialog box. Select the device from the USB Devices
drop‑down menu (figure 24, b).
c. To connect via RS-232:
Click the RS-232 tab in the dialog box. Select the com port the device is connected
to on the host PC from the Com Port drop-down (figure 24, c).
Figure 24.
Connect to device... TCP/IP, USB, and RS-232 Dialog Box
3. When a connection with a device is established, the Synchronize with Device dialog
box opens.
Figure 25.
Synchronize with Device Dialog Box
a. Pull — Pulls the configuration file, presets, macros, and ACP configurations from
the device and displays it in the DSP Configurator main workspace.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
18
b. Push — Pushes the configuration file, presets, macros, and ACP configurations
open in DSP Configurator to the connected DMP 128 FlexPlus. This will overwrite
any configuration currently on the device.
Click Advanced... to open the Advanced Push Options dialog box (see
figure 26).
NOTE: If only pushing selected presets, the preset selection dialog box opens
after clicking OK on the Advanced Push Options dialog box.
Figure 26.
Advanced Push Options Dialog Box
If only pushing selected presets, mark them from the dialog box shown in figure 27
below.
Figure 27.
Preset Selection Dialog Box
4. Once a push or pull is completed, the current state of the connected DMP 128 FlexPlus
is displayed in the DSP Configurator status panel and the device is ready for further
configuration.
Exit Live Mode and Enter Emulate Mode
1. Click the Emulate button in the DSP Configurator menu bar (see figure 28, 1).
Alternatively, select Tools > Disconnect from Device or press <F6> on the keyboard.
Figure 28.
Emulate Button
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
19
2. Click OK to confirm.
Figure 29.
Confirm Disconnect
DSP Configurator Inputs
All available inputs are listed vertically along the left side of the DSP Configurator main
workspace. The input groups can be expanded or collapsed by clicking the (expand) or
(collapse) buttons next to the input group names.
There are four types of inputs available:
• Mic/Line Inputs
• Virtual Returns on page 46
• Aux Inputs on page 41
• Expansion and AT Inputs on page 51
Mic/Line Inputs
The twelve mic/line input channels on the DMP 128 FlexPlus are shown in DSP Configurator
under the Inputs panel (see figure 30 below).
Figure 30.
Inputs Panel
Inputs 1 - 12 offer AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation) DSP capability and inputs 1 - 4 provide
phantom power. Inputs 5 - 12 do not have phantom power. Inputs 1 - 4 can receive line
level signal.
On AT models, expansion inputs can be selected as sources for all 12 inputs.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
20
Naming an Input Channel
1. Click the input name field.
Figure 31.
Input Name Field
2. Highlight or delete the text and enter a new name.
Figure 32.
New Input Name
3. Press <Enter> or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new input
name. Press <Down Arrow> key to navigate to and highlight the next name field.
Figure 33.
Renamed Input
NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an input name.
Input Building Blocks
Extron building blocks are a quick configuration tool that can significantly reduce
configuration time. An input building block is a collection of processor and gain settings for
an input processing chain. These building blocks have been designed by Extron based on
extensive use and testing with each intended application or specific device.
Figure 34.
Accessing Input Building Blocks
Click the input number (see figure 34 above) to open the Building Blocks dialog box.
1 Building Block Folders
2 General Building Blocks
3 Add a Building Block Button
Figure 35.
4 Delete a Building Block Button
5 New Folder Button
6 Building Blocks Help Button
Input Building Blocks Dialog Box
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
21
1
Building Block Folders — These folders group input types together, such as table or
handheld mics, for easy access (see figure 36 below).
Figure 36.
Mic Building Block Folder Contents
2
General Building Blocks — These building blocks provide quick setup for input
sources. General building blocks provide a useful starting point for devices in the same
product category as the name of the building block, such as handheld microphones,
line level sources, and so on.
3
Add a Building Block Button — Creates a custom building block from the current
gain and processor settings on the selected channel. When this button is clicked, the
Add a Building Block dialog box opens. Name the new custom building block and
choose a folder to save the block to, or create a new folder (see figure 37 below).
Figure 37.
Add a Building Block Dialog Box
4
Delete a Building Block Button — Deletes the currently selected building block or
building block folder. If default building blocks are deleted, they can be restored from the
Organize Building Blocks dialog box. Custom building blocks can be saved to a file
from the same dialog box (Organize Building Blocks on page 91).
5
New Folder Button —Creates a new folder or sub-folder in the Building Blocks
dialog box.
6
Building Blocks Help Button — Opens the Building Blocks topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file. This topic contains more information on the different types
of building blocks for inputs and outputs.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
22
Input Processing
The mic/line input processing chain in DSP Configurator is visually represented by a string of
blocks (see figure 38 below). Each block contains a specific processor or type of processor.
For example, the Input Gain block contains a fader to boost or attenuate incoming signal,
the Filter block contains several types of filters, and so on. Inputs 1 - 12 contain the
following signal chain:
1. Input Gain Block
2. Input Filter Block
3. Input AEC Block
4. Input Dynamics Blocks (2)
5. Input Delay Block
6. Input Ducking Block
7. Input Automix Block
8. Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block
Figure 38.
Input Processing Chain
Input Gain Block
Double‑click the ANG GAIN (Input Gain) block to open the Input Gain dialog box.
n
Figure 39.
Input Gain Block
The Input Gain dialog box provides controls to configure the input gain stage of the input
processing path.
1 Input Name
2 Gain Fader
3 dBFS Meter
4 dBFS Numeric Readout
5 Input Gain Text Field
6 Polarity Toggle Button
Figure 40.
7 Mute Button
8 Phantom Power Check Box
9 Source Drop-Down Menu
¢ OK Button
£ Cancel Button
¤ Input Gain Help Button
Input Gain Dialog Box
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
23
1
2
Input Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.
3
dBFS Meter — This meter displays the input signal level in dBFS ranging from
-60 dBFS to 0 dBFS. Once the signal reaches or passes -1 dBFS (default) or the clip
threshold defined in the Options dialog box (Options on page 98), the clip box
located at the top of the meter lights red.
4
dBFS Numeric Readout — This read‑only text box displays the numerical value of the
input signal level in dBFS.
5
Input Gain Text Field — This text field allows the user to enter a gain or attenuation
value in 0.1 dB steps.
6
Polarity Toggle Button — Inverts the signal polarity of the selected input. When the
button displays the black + symbol on a gray field ( ), the polarity is normal. When the
button displays the black - symbol on a yellow field ( ), the polarity is inverted.
7
Mute Button — Mutes signal at the input stage, preventing it from going any further in
the signal processing chain.
8
Phantom Power Check Box — Provides 48 V phantom power to the selected input
for use with condenser microphones. Available on inputs 1 through 4 only.
9
Source Drop-Down Menu (AT models only) — Selects the input audio source for
the channel. Source options are analog or any of the Expansion inputs. Input gain range
changes to +24 dB to -18 dB when using Expansion inputs.
¢
£
OK Button — Confirms changes and closes the Input Gain dialog box.
¤
Input Gain Help Button — Opens the Mic/Line Input Gain topic in the
DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in configuring input gain.
Gain Fader — Provides up to 80 dB of gain or 18 dB of attenuation in 1 dB steps.
Click the fader once and press the <Up Arrow> or <Down Arrow> keys to adjust the
fader up or down in 1 dB steps. Press the <Page Up> or <Page Down> keys to adjust
the fader up or down in 10 dB steps.
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Input Gain dialog box was opened and
closes the dialog box.
Input Filter Block
Double‑click the Filter block to open the filter drop‑down menu. Select one of the eleven
available filters to insert into the block.
Figure 41.
Filter Block and Drop-Down Menu
Alternatively, right-click the Filter block and select Insert, then select a filter to insert it
into the block.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
24
Figure 42.
Insert Filter Drop-Down Menu
Once an initial filter is selected, the Filter block changes to display the type of filter applied.
For example, if High Pass Filter is selected, the Filter block would display HIGH PASS
instead of FILT. If multiple filters are applied, the Filter block displays FILT over a dark
green field.
Figure 43.
Filter Block Icons
Once a filter is applied to the Filter block, double-click the block to open the Filter
dialog box.
1 Filter Channel Name
2 Filter Graph
3 Filter List
4 Set Defaults Button
Figure 44.
5 OK Button
6 Cancel Button
7 Filters Help Button
Filter Dialog Box
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
25
1
Filter Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input
name.
2
Filter Graph — Graphically displays the applied filter curve and provides handles for
adjusting filter parameters. Numbers along the top of the graph represent the filter curve
of the corresponding slot in the filter list below the graph. The number appears over the
center frequency of the filter.
If a filter is active (unbypassed), it appears as a solid red curve. If a filter is bypassed, it
appears as a broken orange curve (such as the bass filter in slot 2).
NOTE: All filters are bypassed by default.
3
Filter List — Provides filter drop-down menus for all 5 available filter slots. Frequency,
Slope, Boost/Cut, Q, and Bypass controls are also available in this list.
Available filters include:
• High Pass Butterworth
• High Pass Linkwitz-Reily
• Low Pass Butterworth
• Low Pass Linkwitz-Reily
• Bass
• High Pass Bessel
• Treble
• Low Pass Bessel
• Parametric
• Loudness
• Notch
NOTE: See the DSP Configurator Help file for more information on each of the
filters. Click the Filters Help button to open the help file topic discussing filters.
4
Set Defaults Button — Resets all filter parameters of all filters in the filter list to their
default values.
To reset a single filter to default parameters, right‑click the filter number on the left side
of the Filter dialog box, and select Set to Default (see figure 45 below).
Figure 45.
Set Single Filter Parameters to Default
5
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Filter dialog box.
6
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Filter dialog box was opened and closes
the dialog box.
7
Filters Help Button — Opens the About Filters topic in the DSP Configurator Help
file. This help file topic discusses each filter type in greater detail.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
26
Input AEC Block
About AEC
Echo occurs when audio from a talker in the far end is received and amplified into the near
end listener’s room, with that sound then being picked up by microphones in the near end
acoustic space and sent back to the far end. The amount of signal sent back to the far end
talker can be substantial, and with the added transmission delay, the result is an echo effect
that can seriously compromise communication in a teleconference or videoconference.
The Extron Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) processor removes the potential echo
signal at the near end mic channel by comparing it to the received signal from the far end,
designated as the “reference,” and then creating an adaptive filter to cancel the potential
echo before it is sent back to the far end.
Successful operation of the AEC processing block is mainly a function of proper gain
structure and selection of an AEC reference. This section provides an overview of those two
elements.
Proper gain structure involves the relationship between the signal at the selected reference
and the signal at the mic input, within the context of proper levels for the reference and mic
inputs independently. The mic input gain setting will naturally be optimized for the voice level
of the talker in that room. Therefore, the amount of signal from the far end picked up by the
mic is dependent on how much far end signal is being amplified in the near end room and
the distance from the mic to the speakers.
AEC Operation
Double-click the AEC block to open the AEC drop-down menu. Select AEC to insert the AEC
processor.
Figure 46.
AEC Block and Drop-Down Menu
NOTE: Insert the AEC processor on the input with the near end microphone connected.
Once the AEC processor is inserted, double‑click the AEC block to open the AEC dialog box.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
27
1
2
3
4
5
6
Activity Panel
ERL Meter
ERLE Meter
TER Meter
Reference Selection Drop‑Down
7
8
9
¢
£
Bypass Button
OK Button
Cancel Button
Show/Hide Advanced Options Button
AEC Help Button
Noise Cancellation Panel
Figure 47.
AEC Dialog Box
1
Activity Panel — Far lights when signal activity is detected from the far end. Near
lights when activity is detected from the near end. Update lights when AEC is updating,
converging, or reconverging.
2
ERL Meter — ERL (echo return loss) is the ratio of the far end signal at the reference
input to the far end signal received at the mic input and is expressed in dB. This meter
should read between -10 dB and +10 dB for proper AEC operation.
3
ERLE Meter — ERLE (echo return loss enhancement) is the amount of potential
echo signal that the AEC algorithm is cancelling (not including NLP processing) and is
expressed in dB.
4
TER Meter — TER (total echo reduction) is the sum of ERL and ERLE and represents
the total amount of echo reduction and is expressed in dB.
5
Reference Selection Drop‑Down Menu — Provides all mic/line inputs, Aux inputs,
virtual returns, line outputs, and Expansion outputs for reference selection. When
a channel is selected as the reference, the AEC processor compares the reference
channel signal to the current input channel.
6
Noise Cancellation Panel — Provides a checkbox to engage the noise canceller
(engaged by default) and text field to enter the amount of noise reduction in dB.
7
Bypass Button — Bypasses the AEC processor. When the button is red, bypass is
enabled.
8
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
AEC dialog box.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
28
9
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the AEC dialog box was opened and closes the
dialog box.
¢
Show/Hide Advanced Options Button — Shows or hides the advanced
configuration options for the AEC processor (AEC Advanced Options below).
£
AEC Help Button — Opens the Acoustic Echo Cancellation topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating AEC processor.
AEC Advanced Options
The AEC dialog box provides advanced NLP (non-linear processing) options for fine tuning
echo cancellation. These options are hidden by default. Click the Show/Hide Advanced
Options button to access them (see figure 47, ¢ on the previous page).
1 Enable NLP Checkbox
2 NLP Presets
3 NLP Reduction Parameters
4 Double Talk Echo Reduction
5 Comfort Noise
Figure 48.
AEC Advanced Options
1
Enable NLP Checkbox — Checked by default, NLP (non-linear processing) is required
to completely remove echo.
2
NLP Presets — Offers three preset options for NLP parameters.
•
Soft — Applies soft preset values to the NLP reduction parameters for light echo
cancellation.
•
Normal (default) — Applies normal preset values to the NLP reduction parameters
for the widest array of echo cancellation needs.
•
Aggressive — Applies aggressive preset values to the NLP reduction parameters
for aggressive echo cancellation.
3
NLP Reduction Parameters — Provides text boxes for Max NLP Reduction, Attack
Time, and Release Time to customize NLP reduction parameters.
4
Double Talk Echo Reduction — Provides a text box to enter a reduction value (in dB)
when double talk occurs. Double talk is when near end talkers and far end talkers are
speaking simultaneously while AEC is engaged.
5
Comfort Noise Text Box — Provides an ambient noise signal to prevent states of
complete silence that may be perceived as a failed or dropped connection. 0 dB is the
default.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
29
Input Dynamics Blocks
Double‑click the Dynamics block to open the dynamics drop‑down menu.
Figure 49.
Dynamics Block and Drop-Down Menu
From the Dynamics drop‑down menu, four types of dynamics processors are available.
Select a dynamics processor type to insert it into the Dynamics block.
There are two Dynamics blocks available per mic/line input channel. Each block can be
configured with any of the processor types.
The four types of dynamics processors available are:
•
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) on the next page
•
Compressor on page 32
•
Limiter on page 33
•
Noise Gate on page 34
Once a dynamics processor is inserted, double‑click the dynamics block icon to open the
corresponding dialog box.
Figure 50.
AGC, Compressor, Limiter, and Noise Gate Icons
If a dynamics processor has been inserted and needs to be changed to a different dynamics
processor, right-click the dynamics block, hover over Insert, and select a new processor to
insert it (see figure 51 below).
Figure 51.
Changing Dynamics Processors
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
30
AGC (Automatic Gain Control)
1 Dynamics Channel Name
2 AGC Graph
3 AGC Parameters List and Control
4 Bypass Button
5 Set Defaults Button
6 OK Button
7 Cancel Button
8 Dynamics Help Button
Figure 52.
AGC Dialog Box
1
Dynamics Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined
input name.
2
AGC Graph — Graphically displays AGC parameter settings. Parameters can also be
adjusted using this graph. Click and drag the yellow lines to adjust the Window parameter.
Click and drag the bottom dot to adjust the Threshold parameter. Click and drag the
middle dot to adjust the Maximum Gain parameter. Click and drag the top dot to adjust
the Target parameter.
3
AGC Parameters List and Control — Provides text boxes to adjust all AGC
parameters. Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time also have sliders that adjust
their respective parameters. Click a slider once and use the <Left Arrow> and
<Right Arrow> keys to adjust the respective parameter in 1 ms steps.
4
Bypass Button — Bypasses the AGC processor. When the button is red, bypass is
enabled.
5
Set Defaults Button — Resets all AGC parameters to their default values. To view
individual parameter default values, see the DSP Configurator Help file by clicking the
Dynamics Help button (8) and opening the About Dynamics topic.
6
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
AGC dialog box.
7
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the AGC dialog box was opened and closes the
dialog box.
8
Dynamics Help Button — Opens the Dynamics Operation topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating dynamics processors.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
31
Compressor
1 Compressor Channel Name
2 Compressor Graph
3 Compressor Parameter List and Control
4 Bypass Button
5 Set Defaults Button
6 OK Button
7 Cancel Button
8 Dynamics Help Button
Figure 53.
Compressor Dialog Box
1
Compressor Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user
defined input name.
2
Compressor Graph — Graphically displays compressor parameter settings.
Parameters can also be adjusted using this graph. Click and drag the dot within the
green area of the graph to adjust the compressor Threshold. Click and drag the dot
outside the green box to adjust the compressor Ratio.
3
Compressor Parameter List and Control — Lists all configurable parameters for
the compressor. Text fields are available to adjust Threshold, Ratio, Attack Time,
Hold Time, and Release Time. Click and drag sliders to adjust Attack Time, Hold Time,
and Release Time. Click a slider once and use the <Left Arrow> and <Right Arrow>
keys to adjust the respective parameter in 1 ms steps. Select the Soft Knee checkbox
to provide a more natural implementation of compression when the signal reaches the
threshold.
4
Bypass Button — Bypasses the compressor. When the button is red, bypass is
enabled.
5
Set Defaults Button — Resets all compressor parameters to their default values. To
view individual parameter default values, see the DSP Configurator Help file by clicking
the Dynamics Help button (8) to open the About Dynamics topic.
6
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Compressor dialog box.
7
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Compressor dialog box was opened and
closes the dialog box.
8
Dynamics Help Button — Opens the Dynamics Operation topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating dynamics processors.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
32
Limiter
1 Limiter Channel Name
2 Limiter Graph
3 Limiter Parameter List and Control
4 Bypass Button
5 Set Defaults Button
6 OK Button
7 Cancel Button
8 Dynamics Help Button
Figure 54.
Limiter Dialog Box
1
Limiter Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined
input name.
2
Limiter Graph — Graphically displays limiter parameter settings. Parameters can also
be adjusted using this graph. Click and drag the dot on the graph to adjust the limiter
Threshold.
3
Limiter Parameter List and Control — Lists all configurable parameters for the
limiter. Text fields are available to adjust Threshold, Attack Time, Hold Time, and
Release Time. Click and drag sliders to adjust Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release
Time. Click a slider once and use the <Left Arrow> and <Right Arrow> keys to adjust
the respective parameter in 1 ms steps. Select the Soft Knee checkbox to provide a
more gradual implementation of limiting when the signal reaches the threshold.
4
5
Bypass Button — Bypasses the limiter. When the button is red, bypass is enabled.
6
Set Defaults Button — Resets all limiter parameters to their default values. To view
individual parameter default values, see the DSP Configurator Help file by clicking the
Dynamics Help button (8) and navigate to the About Dynamics topic.
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Limiter dialog box.
7
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back
to their states when the current instance of the Limiter dialog box was opened and
closes the dialog box.
8
Dynamics Help Button — Opens the Dynamics Operation topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating dynamics processors.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
33
Noise Gate
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 55.
Noise Gate Channel Name
Noise Gate Graph
Noise Gate Parameter List and Control
Bypass Button
Set Defaults Button
OK Button
Cancel Button
Dynamics Help Button
Noise Gate Dialog Box
1
Noise Gate Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user
defined input name.
2
Noise Gate Graph — Graphically displays noise gate parameter settings. Parameters
can also be adjusted using this graph. Click and drag the upper dot to adjust Ratio.
Click and drag the middle dot to adjust Threshold. Click and drag the bottom dot (out of
view at default settings) to adjust Max Attenuation.
3
Noise Gate Parameter List and Control — Lists all configurable parameters
for the noise gate. Text fields are available to adjust Threshold, Max Attenuation,
Ratio, Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time. Click and drag the sliders to
adjust Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time. Click a slider once and use the
<Left Arrow> and <Right Arrow> keys to adjust the respective parameter in 1 ms
steps.
4
Bypass Button — Bypasses the noise gate. When the button is red, bypass is
enabled.
5
Set Defaults Button — Resets all noise gate parameters to their default values. To
view individual parameter default settings, see the DSP Configurator Help file by clicking
the Dynamics Help button (8) and navigate to the About Dynamics topic.
6
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Noise Gate dialog box.
7
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Noise Gate dialog box was opened and
closes the dialog box.
8
Dynamics Help Button — Opens the Dynamics Operation topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating dynamics processors.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
34
Input Delay Block
Double-click the Delay block to open the delay drop‑down. Click Delay to insert the delay
processor into the block.
Figure 56.
Delay Block and Drop-Down Menu
Once a delay processor is inserted into the Delay block, double-click the block to open the
Delay dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 57.
Delay Channel Name
Units of Measurement
Delay Fader and Text Box
Temperature Panel
OK Button
Set Defaults Button
Cancel Button
Bypass Button
Delay Help Button
Delay Dialog Box
1
Delay Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input
name.
2
Units of Measurement — Radio buttons change the unit of measurement used by
the delay fader and text box. Samples, Milliseconds, Feet, and Meters are available
units of measurement. Values are converted when the unit of measurement is changed.
Changing the unit of measurement does not alter the amount of delay applied to the
signal.
3
Delay Fader and Text Box — Adjusts the amount of delay applied to the signal. Click
and drag the fader up or down to increase or decrease the amount of delay. Click the
fader once and use the <Up Arrow> or <Down Arrow> to adjust delay in 1 sample steps
(or the 1 sample equivalent in milliseconds, feet, or meters). Use the text box below the
fader to input a delay value.
4
Temperature Panel — Becomes available when using delay in feet or meters.
Compensates delay for ambient temperature in the acoustic space. Temperature is not
available when using samples or milliseconds as the unit of measurement.
5
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Delay dialog box.
6
7
Set Defaults Button — Resets the delay to 4800 samples.
8
9
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Delay dialog box was opened and closes
the dialog box.
Bypass Button — Bypasses the delay. When the button is red, bypass is enabled.
Delay Help Button —Opens the Delay Operation topic of the DSP Configurator Help
file for further assistance in understanding operating the delay processor.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
35
Input Ducking Block
The duck block contains a ducking processor as well as an adaptive gain processor.
•
Ducker (see the next page) — Decreases levels on specified channels when signal is
present above a set threshold on the duck source (trigger).
•
Adaptive Gain (see page 38) — Increases levels on specified channels when signal
is present above a set threshold on the adaptive gain source channel (trigger).
Double-click the Duck block to open the drop‑down menu where the Ducker and Adaptive
Gain processors can be selected.
Figure 58.
Duck Block and Drop-Down Menu
Select Ducker to insert a ducking processor into the duck block. Select Adaptive Gain
to insert an adaptive gain processor into the duck block. Depending on the processor
selected, the duck block displays DUCK for a ducker or AG for adaptive gain.
Figure 59.
Ducking Block Icons
If a ducking processor has been inserted and needs to be changed to an adaptive gain
processor, or vice versa, right-click the block and hover over Insert to insert a different
processor (see figure 60 below).
Figure 60.
Changing Ducking Processor
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
36
Ducker
After inserting a ducker processor, double‑click the Duck icon to open the
Ducker Configuration dialog box.
1 Duck Source Configuration
2 Duck Parameter Settings
3 Duck Priority Tree
4 Ducking Operation Help Button
Figure 61.
Ducker Configuration Dialog Box
1
Duck Source Configuration — The Enable Source Mic/Line checkbox is checked
when a ducker is inserted (default). In the Duck column, check the inputs that will be
ducked. In the by (dB) column, enter the amount of ducking that will occur on each
channel selected in the Duck column. When the threshold is exceeded on the duck
source, ducking occurs on the selected channels.
2
Duck Parameter Settings — Contains controls for setting Threshold, Attack Time,
Hold Time, and Release. Click the Ducking Operation Help button (4) to open the
Ducking Operation topic in the DSP Configurator Help fie.
3
Duck Priority Tree — Displays the ducking priority for all Input and Aux In channels.
Select another input to populate the Ducker Configuration dialog with the ducker
information for that channel. Channels with an adaptive gain processor are appended
with an (AG) (see Mic 4 in figure 61 above). Channels with adaptive gain processors
cannot be selected from this dialog box.
4
Ducking Operation Help Button —Opens the Ducking Operation topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in ducker configuration.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
37
Adaptive Gain
After inserting an adaptive gain processor, double‑click the AG icon to open the
Adaptive Gain dialog box.
1 Adaptive Gain Source Configuration
2 Adaptive Gain Parameter Settings
3 Adaptive Gain Operation Help Button
Figure 62.
1
Adaptive Gain Dialog Box
Adaptive Gain Source Configuration — In the Add Gain To column, check the inputs
that will have gain added by the adaptive gain processor. In the Max Gain (dB) column,
enter the maximum amount of gain that will be applied to each channel selected in the
Add Gain To column. When a box is checked, gain is applied to that channel when
signal exceeds the threshold on the adaptive gain trigger channel.
NOTE: For every 1 dB of signal beyond the level set in the Threshold field, 1 dB
of gain will be added to the channels selected in the Add Gain To column. This
occurs until the maximum gain set in the Max Gain (dB) field has been applied.
2
Adaptive Gain Parameter Settings — Contains controls for Threshold, Attack Time,
Hold Time, and Release Time.
3
Adaptive Gain Operation Help Button — Opens the Adaptive Gain Operation topic
of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in adaptive gain configuration.
Input Automix Block
Double-click the Automix block to open a drop-down menu. Select Auto‑mixer to insert the
automix processor into the block.
Figure 63.
Automix Block and Drop-Down
Once the automix processor is inserted into the Automix block, double-click the block to
open the Automix dialog box.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
38
1 Automix Channel Name
2 AM Group Assignment Panel
3 Show AM Group Details Button
4 Automix Parameters
5 dBFS Meter
6 Gate Status Indicator
7 Monitor Gate Checkbox
8 Set Defaults Button
9 Bypass Button
¢ OK Button
£ Cancel Button
¤ Automix Help Button
Figure 64.
Automix Dialog Box
1
Automix Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined
input name.
2
AM Group Assignment Panel — Provides nine radio buttons to assign the current
automix processor to an AM (automix) group. The default is None and leaves the
automixer unassigned.
3
Show AM Group Details Button — Opens the Automix Groups dialog box (click the
Automix Help button for more information regarding Automix Groups).
4
5
6
Automix Parameters — Provides configuration controls for all automix parameters.
7
Monitor Gate Checkbox — Click the Monitor Gate checkbox to enable SIS
responses regarding gate status (see Automixer Gate Monitoring on the next page).
8
9
Set Defaults Button — Resets all automix parameters to their default settings.
¢
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Automix dialog box.
£
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the Automix dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.
¤
Automix Help Button — Opens the Automix topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for
further assistance in configuring the automix processor.
dBFS Meter — Displays the post-automix signal level.
Gate Status Indicator — This LED lights when monitoring is enabled and the gate is
open.
Bypass Button — Bypasses the automix processor. When the button is red, bypass is
enabled.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
39
Automixer Gate Monitoring
Automixer gate monitoring allows the user to track when an automixer gate opens or
closes. This feature can be enabled by checking the Monitor Gate checkbox in an Automix
dialog (figure 64, 7 on the previous page). When automixer gate monitoring is enabled
for a channel, an unsolicited message is sent when the gate has opened or closed. The
response will include the Automixer OID, gate open or closed status, and the signal level
immediately after the status has changed (see Automixer Gate Monitoring on page 150
for SIS response syntax).
Comparing the automixer gate threshold setting to the gate status in the response will
indicate whether the automixer gate has opened or closed. When the gate status in the
response is 1024 or greater, the gate has opened, and when the gate status in the response
is less than 1024, the gate has closed.
Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block
Double‑click the pre-mixer Gain block to open the Pre-mixer Gain dialog box.
Figure 65.
Input Pre-mixer Gain Block
The Pre-mixer Gain dialog box provides controls to boost, attenuate, and mute the signal
after input processing occurs and before it is sent to the mix matrix.
1 Input Name
2 Pre-mixer Gain Fader
3 Pre-mixer Gain Text Box
4 Mute Button
5 OK Button
6 Cancel Button
7 Pre-mixer Gain Help Button
Figure 66.
Input Pre-mixer Gain Dialog Box
1
2
Input Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.
3
4
Pre-mixer Gain Text Box — Enter a gain or attenuation value in 0.1 dB steps.
5
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Pre-mixer Gain dialog box.
Pre-mixer Gain Fader — Click and drag the gain fader to provide up to 12 dB of
gain or 100 dB of attenuation in 1 dB steps. Click the fader and use the <Up Arrow> or
<Down Arrow> keys to adjust the fader up or down in 1 dB steps.
Mute Button — Mutes signal at the pre‑mixer stage, preventing it from reaching the
mix matrices.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
40
6
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Pre-mixer Gain dialog box was opened
and closes the dialog box.
7
Pre-mixer Gain Help Button — Opens the Pre-mixer Gain topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in understanding operating the
Pre‑mixer Gain dialog.
Aux Inputs
Eight Aux inputs are available with processing. These inputs can be assigned as one of the
following:
•
Player inputs that play audio files stored in the DMP 128 FlexPlus internal memory (see
Player Input on the next page)
•
USB inputs that receive audio via the rear panel USB audio port (USB Input on
page 43)
•
VoIP lines for use with a VoIP network (V-model only, VoIP Input on page 43)
Figure 67.
Aux Inputs Panel
Renaming an Aux Input
1. Click the input name field.
Figure 68.
Aux Input Name Field
2. Delete or highlight the text and type the desired name.
Figure 69.
New Aux Input Name
3. Press the <Enter> key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new
name. Press the <Down Arrow> key to navigate to and highlight the next name field.
Figure 70.
Renamed Aux Input
NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Aux input name.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
41
Aux Input Building Blocks
Building blocks can be applied to all eight Aux input channels. These buildings blocks
function the same as the mic/line input building blocks (see Input Building Blocks on
page 21 for more information on configuring Aux input building blocks).
Aux Input Processing
The input processing chain in DSP Configurator is visually represented by a string of blocks.
Each block contains a specific processor or type of processor. Aux Inputs 1 through 8
contain the following signal processing chain:
1. Aux Input Gain Block
2. Aux Input Filter Block
3. Aux Input Dynamics Block (2)
4. Aux Input Ducking Block
5. Aux Input Automix Block
6. Aux Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block
Aux Input Gain Block
By default, the Aux input gain block does not have an input source selected. Double‑click
the block to open the input selection drop‑down, presenting three options for each Aux
input source:
•
Player — Plays audio files stored on the DMP 128 FlexPlus internal memory.
•
USB — Receives audio input from the rear panel USB port.
•
VoIP (V-model only) — Receives audio input from the VoIP network.
Player Input
Right-click the Aux input gain block and hover the mouse over Player... to display
the eight available players. If no audio file is assigned to the player, the player displays
[unassigned]. If an audio file is assigned to the player, the player displays the filename
(see Players on page 75 for more information on configuring players). Select one of the
players to insert it as the source for the selected Aux input.
Figure 71.
Aux Input Player Selection
Once a player is selected as an Aux input source, start and stop controls are available in
Live mode by right clicking the input gain dialog and hovering over Player Control....
Figure 72.
Player Start and Stop Controls
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
42
USB Input
Right-click the Aux input gain block and hover the mouse over USB... to display the
available USB audio channels. Select one of the USB channels to insert it as the source for
the selected Aux input.
NOTE: The number of channels shown will depend on the USB Audio channel
configuration (see Configure USB Audio on page 82).
In a 4x4 channel configuration, the four USB channels appear as two pairs of stereo
channels:
•
USB 1 left and right channels are for communications audio from a connected computer.
•
USB 2 left and right channels are for playback audio from a connected computer.
The DMP 128 FlexPlus appears both as a communications and as a playback audio device
in the operating system of the host computer. Select the DMP 128 FlexPlus as the output
device for both communication audio and playback audio to route audio from the host
computer to the DMP 128 FlexPlus via the rear panel USB audio port.
Figure 73.
Aux Input USB Selection
VoIP Input
Right-click the Aux input gain block and hover the mouse over VoIP... to display the eight
available VoIP lines. Select one of the VoIP lines to insert it as the source for the selected
Aux input. Aux inputs with VoIP lines selected as the source receive signal via the far end of
the VoIP network. VoIP lines can be assigned to Aux channels before the line is registered
with the call server; however, VoIP lines must be registered with a call server and configured
from the DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP web page before these inputs can function properly (see
DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP Web Page on page 171). Multiple appearances of a single line
can be placed on multiple Aux inputs for conference calling capabilities.
NOTE: When a VoIP line is assigned as the source or removed from Aux input, the same
VoIP line is assigned to or removed from the corresponding Aux output.
Figure 74.
Aux Input VoIP Line Selection
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
43
Aux Input Dialog Box
Once a source has been selected for an Aux input, double‑click the Aux input gain block to
open the Aux Input dialog box.
1 Aux Input Name
2 Aux Input Gain Fader
3 Aux Input Gain Text Box
4 Polarity Button
5 Mute Button
6 OK Button
7 Cancel Button
8 Aux Input Help Button
Figure 75.
Aux Input Gain Dialog Box
1
Input Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined Aux input
name.
2
Aux Input Gain Fader — Click and drag the gain fader to provide up to 24 dB of
gain or 18 dB of attenuation in 1 dB steps. Click the fader and use the <Up Arrow> or
<Down Arrow> keys to adjust the fader up or down in 1 dB steps.
3
4
Aux Input Gain Text Box — Enter a gain or attenuation value in 0.1 dB steps.
5
Mute Button — Mutes signal at the Aux input stage, preventing it from going any
further in the signal processing chain.
6
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Aux Input dialog box.
7
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Aux Input dialog box was opened and
closes the dialog box.
8
Aux Input Help Button — Opens the Aux Input topic of the DSP Configurator Help
file for further assistance in configuring Aux input sources.
Polarity Button — Click this button to invert the signal polarity of the selected Aux
input. When the button displays the black + symbol on a gray field ( ), the polarity is
normal. When the button displays the black - symbol on a yellow field ( ), the polarity is
inverted.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
44
Aux Input Filter Block
One filter block is available for each Aux input channel. This filter block functions the same
as the mic/line input filter block (see Input Filter Block on page 24 for information on
configuring the Aux input filter block).
Aux Input Dynamics Block
Two dynamics blocks are available for each Aux input. These blocks function the same
as the mic/line input dynamics blocks (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 30 for
information on configuring the Aux input dynamics blocks).
Aux Input Ducking Block
One ducking block is available for each Aux input. This block functions the same as the
mic/line input ducking block (see Input Ducking Block on page 36 for information on
configuring the Aux input ducking block).
Aux Input Automix Block
One automix block is available for each Aux input. This block functions the same as the
mic/line input automix block (see Input Automix Block on page 38 for information on
configuring the Aux input automix block).
Aux Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block
The Aux input pre-mixer gain block functions the same as the mic/line input pre-mixer gain
block (see Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block on page 40 for information on configuring the
Aux input pre-mixer gain block).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
45
Virtual Returns
Virtual returns receive signal when inputs are routed to the virtual send bus (see Virtual
Send Bus on page 65). Sixteen virtual return channels are available and are labeled A
through P. These channels can be used in a number of applications. For example, they can
act as an AEC reference channel or be used for sub‑mix processing.
Figure 76.
Virtual Returns Input Panel
Renaming a Virtual Return
1. Click the virtual return name field.
Figure 77.
Virtual Return Name Field
2. Delete or highlight the text and type the desired name.
Figure 78.
New Virtual Return Name
3. Press the <Enter> key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new
name. Press the <Down Arrow> key to navigate to and highlight the next name field.
Figure 79.
Renamed Virtual Return
NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit a Virtual Return name.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
46
Virtual Return Building Blocks
Building blocks can be applied to all 16 virtual return channels (see Input Building Blocks
on page 21 for more information on configuring virtual return building blocks).
Virtual Return Processing
Virtual returns A through D contain the following signal processing chain:
1. Virtual Return Feedback Suppressor Block
2. Virtual Return Filter Block
3. Virtual Return Dynamics Block
4. Virtual Return Delay Block
5. Virtual Return Pre-Mixer Gain Block
Virtual returns E through P contain the following signal processing chain:
1. Virtual Return Filter Block
2. Virtual Return Dynamics Block
3. Virtual Return Delay Block
4. Virtual Return Pre-Mixer Gain Block
NOTE: Only Virtual Return channels A through D contain Feedback Suppression
processing blocks.
Virtual Return Feedback Suppressor Block
Use the feedback suppressor when there is an indication of feedback during live operation.
Dynamic filters automatically detect feedback on a live mic channel, and engage a set of
up to 5 fixed and 15 dynamic filters to counteract feedback at the detected frequencies.
The dynamic filters act in a “first in, first out” rotation. If all 15 dynamic filters are employed
and an additional feedback frequency is detected, the first feedback frequency detected is
overwritten.
To avoid a new feedback frequency overwriting a previously detected frequency, up to 5
dynamic filters can be transferred into fixed filters. Once a dynamic filter is transferred into a
fixed filter, it can only be overwritten by manually assigning a new frequency to the filter.
Double-click the feedback suppressor block to show the feedback suppressor drop‑down
menu. Select Feedback Suppressor to insert a feedback suppressor processor into the
signal chain.
Figure 80.
Feedback Suppressor Block and Drop-Down Menu
After inserting the feedback suppressor in the signal chain, double-click the FBS block to
open the Feedback Suppressor dialog box.
Feedback Suppressor Dialog Box
The Feedback Suppressor dialog box contains three tabs for configuring feedback
suppression.
•
Settings Tab on the next page
•
Dynamic Filters Tab on page 49
•
Fixed Filters Tab on page 50
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
47
Settings Tab
1 Settings Tab
2 Composite View Panel
3 Filter Graph
4 Q Adjustment Panel
5 Attack Time Panel
6 Hold Time Panel
7 Bypass FBS Button
8 Set Defaults Button
9 OK Button
¢ Cancel Button
Figure 81.
1
2
Feedback Suppressor Dialog Box - Settings Tab
Settings Tab — Provides access to the global FBS settings.
Composite View Panel — Three radio buttons control which filters are displayed in the
filter graph:
• Only Dynamic FBS Filters
• Only Fixed FBS Filters
• Fixed & Dynamic FBS Filters (default)
3
Filter Graph — Displays the dynamic filters, fixed filters, or both, as selected in the
Composite View panel.
4
Q Adjustment Panel — Adjust the default Q parameter of the dynamic filters using the
text box or the up/down spinner controls.
5
6
Attack Time Panel — Adjust the default Attack Time for dynamic filters.
7
Bypass FBS — Turns off feedback detection when bypass is engaged (button is red
when bypass is engaged). Only the dynamic filters are bypassed. Fixed filters remain
active.
8
Set Defaults Button — Resets parameters on all tabs to their default values and
positions.
9
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Feedback Suppressor dialog box.
¢
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Feedback Suppressor dialog box was
opened and closes the dialog box.
Hold Time Panel — Provides an Enable checkbox, that enables the Hold Time
parameter. Entering a time into the Hold Time text boxes sets how long each dynamic
filter will hold before removing the filter.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
48
Dynamic Filters Tab
1 Dynamic Filters Tab
2 Dynamic Filters List
3 Move to Fixed Button
4 Clear Button
5 Clear All Button
6 Lock Button
7 Bypass FBS
8 Set Defaults Button
9 OK Button
¢ Cancel Button
Figure 82.
Feedback Suppressor Dialog Box - Dynamic Filters Tab
1
2
Dynamic Filters Tab — Provides access to dynamic filter configuration options.
3
Move to Fixed Button — Transfers the dynamic filter along with its current parameters
to the Fixed Filters tab, allowing parameters to be edited. This frees up a filter slot in
the Dynamic Filters list.
4
5
Clear Button — Clears the dynamic filter and contained parameters.
6
Lock Button — Locks current dynamic filters and prevents more dynamic filters from
being applied.
7
Bypass FBS Button — Bypasses the FBS processor. When the button is red, FBS is
bypassed.
8
Set Defaults Button — Resets parameters on all tabs to their default values and
positions.
9
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Feedback Suppressor dialog box.
¢
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Feedback Suppressor dialog box was
opened and closes the dialog box.
Dynamic Filters List — Displays a list of 15 dynamic feedback suppression filters.
As feedback is detected on the virtual return channel, dynamic filters are applied to
suppress feedback with the Q parameter defined in the Settings tab.
Clear All Button — Clears all dynamic filters and resets the feedback detection and
suppression process.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
49
Fixed Filters Tab
1 Fixed Filters Tab
2 Fixed Filters List
3 Filter Parameters
4 Single Filter Bypass Button
5 Clear All Button
6 Bypass FBS Button
7 Set Defaults Button
8 OK Button
9 Cancel Button
¢ Feedback Suppressor Help Button
Figure 83.
Feedback Suppressor Dialog Box - Fixed Filters Tab
1
2
3
Fixed Filters Tab — Provides access to fixed filter configuration options.
4
Single Filter Bypass Button — Bypasses only the filter associated with that filter slot.
When the button is red, the filter is bypassed.
5
6
Clear All Button — Clears all fixed filters from the list.
7
Set Defaults Button — Resets parameters on all tabs to their default values and
positions.
8
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Feedback Suppressor dialog box.
9
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Feedback Suppressor dialog box was
opened and closes the dialog box.
¢
Feedback Suppressor Help Button — Opens the Feedback Suppressor topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in understanding and operating the
feedback suppression processor.
Fixed Filters List — Displays up to 5 fixed feedback suppression filters.
Filter Parameters — Configure the Frequency, Boost/Cut, and Q parameters for each
fixed filter using the text boxes.
Bypass FBS Button — Bypasses the FBS processor. When the button is red, FBS is
bypassed.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
50
Virtual Return Filter Block
One filter block is available for each virtual return channel. This filter block functions the
same as the mic/line input filter block (see Input Filter Block on page 24 for information
on configuring the virtual return filter block).
Virtual Return Dynamics Block
One dynamics block is available for each virtual return channel. This block functions the
same as the mic/line input dynamics block (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 30 for
information on configuring the virtual return dynamics block).
Virtual Return Delay Block
One delay block is available for each virtual return channel. This block functions the same
as the mic/line input delay block (see Input Delay Block on page 35 for information on
configuring the virtual return delay block).
Virtual Return Pre-Mixer Gain Block
The virtual return pre-mixer gain block functions the same as the mic/line input pre‑mixer
gain block (see Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block on page 40 for information on configuring
the virtual return pre-mixer gain block).
Expansion and AT Inputs
The expansion inputs receive signal via the rear panel EXP port when connected with
another EXP enabled device. AT inputs receive signal from the Dante network when
connected to an audio network. The DMP 128 FlexPlus can receive 16 channels of audio
via the EXP port and 48 channels of audio via Dante. On a DMP 128 FlexPlus model, AT
inputs 33 through 48 can be used for the EXP inputs allowing use of the Dante network and
the EXP port simultaneously (see Expansion Bus on page 98).
Renaming an Expansion or AT Input
NOTES:
• AT inputs can only be renamed when connected in Live mode. Default input names
appear in Emulate mode.
• Renaming an AT input in DSP Configurator affects the receiver name in
Dante Controller. Alternatively, renaming a receiver channel name in Dante Controller
affects the name displayed in DSP Configurator (see Renaming a Receiver or
Transmitter on page 115).
1. Click the expansion or AT input name field.
Figure 84.
Expansion Input Name Field
2. Delete or highlight the text and type the desired name.
Figure 85.
New Expansion Input Name
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
51
3. Press the <Enter> key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new
name. Press the <Down Arrow> key to navigate to and highlight the next name field.
Figure 86.
Renamed Expansion
NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Expansion Input name.
Expansion and AT Inputs Overview
With the Extron Expansion Port (EXP), two EXP enabled devices can be connected for
bidirectional communication of 16 audio channels. When two units are connected, one
unit must be set as the Primary Unit and the other must be set as the Secondary Unit (see
Expansion Bus on page 98). This synchronizes the sampling clocks of the two units.
AT inputs allow a DMP 128 FlexPlus model to receive signal from the audio network.
Network audio routing is done with Dante Controller (see Dante Controller on page 111).
Figure 87.
Expansion Bus Panel with AT and Expansion Inputs
Expansion and AT Inputs Processing
The expansion and AT inputs contain two processor blocks in their signal chain:
1. Automix Block
2. Pre-mixer Gain Block
Expansion and AT Input Automix Block
One automix block is available for each expansion and AT input. This block functions the
same as the mic/line input automix block (see Input Automix Block on page 38 for
information on configuring the EXP input automix block).
Expansion and AT Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block
The expansion and AT input pre-mixer gain block functions the same as the mic/line input
pre‑mixer gain block (see Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block on page 40 for information on
configuring the virtual return pre-mixer gain block).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
52
Mix-Points
DSP Configurator contains twelve mix matrices that connect all inputs and outputs (see
figure 88 on the next page). The mix matrices set post-processing mix levels.
Each input is connected to a mix-point for the signal to be routed to an output. In general,
mix levels are set relative to each other, achieving a blend of input signals at an optimal
output level, close to, but not exceeding 0 dBFS at the output.
NOTE: In order for mix-points to appear in the workspace, the input group sending
signal to the mix-point must be expanded and the input channel must be visible.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
53
1
4
7
10
Figure 88.
2
5
8
11
3
6
9
12
1
Mic/Line Inputs to Line
and Aux Outputs
2
Mic/Line Inputs to EXP
Outputs
3
Mic/Line Inputs to
Virtual Sends
4
Aux Inputs to Line and
Aux Outputs
5
Aux Inputs to EXP
Outputs
6
Aux Inputs to Virtual
Sends
7
Virtual Returns to Line
and Aux Outputs
8
Virtual Returns to EXP
Outputs
9
Virtual Returns to
Virtual Sends
¢
EXP Inputs to Line and
Aux Outputs
£
EXP Inputs to EXP
Outputs
¤
EXP Inputs to Virtual
Sends
DSP Configurator Mix Matrices
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
54
Mix-Point Dialog Box
Double-click a mix-point to open the Mix-point dialog box. Alternatively, highlight a
mix‑point with a single click and press the <Enter> key to open the Mix-point dialog box.
1 Mix-point Input and Output
2 Mix-point Fader
3 Level Text Box
4 Mute Button
5 Mix Dot Selection
6 OK Button
7 Cancel Button
Figure 89.
Mix-point Dialog Box
1
Mix-point Input and Output — Displays which input (top) and output (bottom) the
mix-point is connecting.
2
Mix-point Fader — Click and drag the mix-point fader to provide up to 12 dB of gain
or 100 dB of attenuation in 1 dB steps. Click the fader and use the <Up Arrow> or
<Down Arrow> keys to change the level in 1 dB steps.
3
4
Level Text Box — Allows specific level values to be entered in 0.1 dB steps.
5
Mix Dot Selection — Three radio buttons provide options to choose the type of input
processing applied to the mix-point.
Mute Button — Mutes the mix-point (muted by default). When the button is red, the
mix point is muted.
NOTE: Mix dot selections are not available on Virtual Return or EXP mix‑points.
6
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Mix-point dialog box.
7
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Mix-Point dialog box was opened and
closes the dialog box.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
55
Mix-Point Context Menu
Right-click a mix-point to open the mix-point context menu. This menu provides quick
options to operate mix-points.
Figure 90.
Mix-Point Context Menu
1
2
Mute — Mutes the mix-point.
3
Bypass Automixer — Bypasses automixer processing at the mix-point and marks the
mix-dot blue to signify automixing is bypassed.
4
Include Automixer — Includes automixer processing at the mix-point and marks the
mix‑dot orange to signify automixing is included.
5
Bypass Processors (*Except filter block) — Bypasses signal processing, except
for filters, at the mix-point and marks the mix‑dot green to signify signal processing is
bypassed.
6
Cut — Cuts the mix-point parameter configuration, preparing it to be pasted to another
mix-point. The parameter configuration information is not removed until it is pasted to
another mix-point.
7
Copy — Copies the mix-point parameter configuration, leaving the mix-point intact and
preparing it to be pasted to another mix-point.
8
Paste — Pastes a previously cut or copied mix-point parameter configuration to the
selected mix-point.
9
¢
Delete — Deletes the mix-point parameter configuration and mutes the mix-point.
£
Unmark Row — Unmarks the entire row containing the selected mix-point.
Unmute — Unmutes the mix-point and creates an audio path between an input and
output.
Mark Row — Marks the entire row containing the selected mix-point, highlighting all of
the elements.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
56
DSP Configurator Outputs
The outputs run along the top right of the main workspace in DSP Configurator. There are
three types of outputs available:
•
Outputs on the next page
•
Aux Outputs on page 61
•
Expansion Outputs on page 63
These outputs receive signal when mix-point connections are made between an input and
an output in the mix-matrices.
Each output panel can be expanded or collapsed by clicking the
buttons.
(expand) or
(collapse)
Outputs
Eight outputs are available in the Outputs panel and route signal to the eight rear panel line
level analog outputs. Signal routed to these outputs can also be transmitted onto the Dante
network.
Figure 91.
Outputs Panel
Naming an Output
1. Click the output name field.
Figure 92.
Output Name Field
2. Delete the text and type the desired output name.
Figure 93.
New Output Name
3. Press the <Enter> key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new
output name. Press the <Down Arrow> key to navigate to and highlight the next name
field.
Figure 94.
Renamed Output
NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Output name.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
57
Output Building Blocks
Extron building blocks are a quick configuration tool that can significantly reduce
configuration time. A building block is a collection of processor and gain settings for an
input or output processing chain. These building blocks have been built by Extron based on
extensive use and testing with each intended application or specific device.
Figure 95.
Accessing Building Blocks on an Output
Click the output number to open the Building Blocks dialog box.
1 Output Building Blocks List
2 Add a Building Block Button
3 Delete a Building Block Button
4 New Folder Button
5 Building Blocks Help Button
Figure 96.
1
2
Output Building Blocks Dialog Box
Output Building Blocks List — Contains building blocks for output channels.
Add a Building Block Button — Allows users to create custom building blocks,
saving the currently applied gain and processor settings on the selected channel. Click
the icon to open the Add a Building Block dialog box. This allows users to name the
new custom building block and choose the folder to save the block to an existing folder,
or create a new folder.
Figure 97.
Add a Building Block Dialog Box
3
Delete a Building Block Button — Deletes the currently selected building block or
building block folder. If default building blocks are deleted, they can be restored from the
Organize Building Blocks dialog box.
4
5
New Folder Button —Creates a new folder or sub-folder.
Building Blocks Help Button — Opens the Building Blocks topic of the
DSP Configurator Help file. This topic contains more information on the different types
of building blocks for inputs and outputs.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
58
Output Processing
The output processing chain in DSP Configurator is represented by a string of blocks (see
figure 98 below). Each block contains a specific processor or type of processor. Each output
contains the following processor chain:
1. Output Trim Block
2. Output Delay Block
3. Output Filter Block
4. Output Dynamics Block
5. Output Attenuation Block
Figure 98.
Output Processing Chain
Output Trim Block
Double-click the output Trim block to open the Post-mixer Trim dialog box.
Figure 99.
Output Trim Block
The Post-mixer Trim dialog box provides pre-processing gain and attenuation control for
the selected output.
1 Output Name
2 Post-mixer Trim Fader
3 Post-mixer Trim Text Box
4 OK Button
5 Cancel Button
Figure 100. Post-mixer Trim Dialog Box
1
2
Output Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined output name.
3
Post-mixer Trim Text Box — Allows the user to enter a gain or attenuation value in
0.1 dB steps.
4
OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Post-mixer Trim dialog box.
5
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Post-mixer Trim dialog box was opened
and closes the dialog box.
Post-mixer Trim Fader — Click and drag the trim fader to provide up to 12 dB of gain
or 12 dB of attenuation in 0.1 dB steps. Click the trim fader and use the <Up Arrow> or
<Down Arrow> to adjust the fader up or down in 0.1 dB steps.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
59
Output Delay Block
One delay block is available for each output channel. This block functions the same as
the mic/line input delay block (see Input Delay Block on page 35 for information on
configuring the output delay block).
Output Filter Block
One filter block is available for each output channel. This filter block functions the same as
the mic/line input filter block, except that there are 10 slots for filters instead of 5 (see Input
Filter Block on page 24 for information on configuring output filters).
Output Dynamics Block
One dynamics block is available for each output channel. This block functions the same
as the mic/line input dynamics block (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 30 for
information on configuring the output dynamics block).
Output Attenuation Block
Double-click the output Attenuation block to open the Attenuation dialog box.
Figure 101. Output Attenuation Block
The Attenuation dialog box provides attenuation control for the selected output.
1 Output Name
2 Output Attenuation Fader
3 Output Attenuation Text Box
4 dBFS Meter
5 dBFS Text Readout
6 Polarity Button
7 Mute Button
8 OK Button
9 Cancel Button
Figure 102. Attenuation Dialog Box
1
2
Output Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined output name.
3
Output Attenuation Text Box — Allows the user to enter a gain or attenuation value in
0.1 dB steps.
4
dBFS Meter — Provides post-attenuation and pre-mute a readout of the output signal
level.
Output Attenuation Fader — Click and drag the trim fader to provide up to 100 dB of
attenuation. Click the trim fader and use the <Up Arrow> or <Down Arrow> to adjust the
fader up or down in 1 dB steps.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
60
5
6
dBFS Text Readout — Displays a numerical readout of the output signal level.
Polarity Button — Click this button to invert the signal polarity of the selected output.
When the button displays the black + symbol on a gray field ( ), the polarity is normal.
When the button displays the black - symbol on a yellow field ( ), the polarity is
inverted.
7 Mute Button — Mutes the signal at the output stage.
8 OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the
Attenuation dialog box.
9
Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to
their states when the current instance of the Attenuation dialog box was opened and
closes the dialog box.
Aux Outputs
Eight Aux outputs (non-V-models) or eight Aux outputs (V-models only) are available in the
Aux Outputs panel. These outputs can be configured to route signal to a host computer as
USB audio via the rear panel USB audio port or to a VoIP network via a rear panel LAN port
(V-models only).
Figure 103. Aux Outputs Panel
Naming an Aux Output
1. Click the Aux output name field.
Figure 104. Aux Output Name Field
2. Delete the text and type the desired Aux output name.
Figure 105. New Aux Output Name
3. Press the <Enter> key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new
output name. Press the <Down Arrow> to navigate to and highlight the next name field.
Figure 106. Renamed Aux Output
NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Aux output name.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
61
Aux Output Processing
The Aux output processing chain in DSP Configurator is represented by a string of blocks
(see figure 107 below). Each block contains a specific processor or type of processor. Each
Aux output contains the following processor chain:
1. Aux Output Trim Block
2. Aux Output Filter Block
3. Aux Output Dynamics Block
4. Aux Output Gain Block
Figure 107. Aux Output Processing Chain
Aux Output Trim Block
One trim block is available for each Aux output channel. This trim block functions the same
as the output trim block (see Output Trim Block on page 59 for more information on
configuring the Aux output trim block).
Aux Output Filter Block
One filter block is available for each output channel. This filter block functions the same
as the mic/line input filter block (see Input Filter Block on page 24 for information on
configuring the Aux output filter block).
Aux Output Dynamics Block
One dynamics block is available for each output channel. This block functions the same
as the mic/line input dynamics block (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 30 for
information on configuring the Aux output dynamics block).
Aux Output Gain Block
Right-click the Aux output gain block to access a drop-down menu that displays USB
and VoIP (V-models only) output options. A selection must be made before audio passes
through an Aux output.
Figure 108. Aux Output Gain Block and Drop-Down Menu
The USB... and VoIP... selections in the Aux output mimic that of the Aux input (see Aux
Input Gain Block on page 42).
NOTES:
• For a 4x4 channel configuration, it is recommended that the USB 1 left and right
channels be used for communication audio and USB 2 left and right channels be
used for line input. For different configurations, USB 3 and USB 4 are also available.
• When a VoIP line is assigned as the source for an Aux input, the same VoIP line is
assigned to the corresponding Aux output. For example, if VoIP Line 1 is assigned
to Aux input 1, VoIP line 1 is automatically assigned to Aux output 1 as well.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
62
Once an output has been selected, double-click the Aux output gain block again to open
the Aux Output dialog box. This dialog box functions the same as the Aux input gain block
(see Output Attenuation Block on page 60 for information on configuring the Aux
Output dialog box).
Expansion Outputs
Sixteen outputs are available in the Expansion Outputs panel. These outputs contain DSP
processing capabilities and route audio to the rear panel EXP port when another EXP device
is connected. These channels can also be transmitted to the Dante network.
Figure 109. Expansion Outputs Panel
Naming an Expansion Output
1. Click the expansion output name field.
Figure 110. Expansion Output Name Field
2. Delete the text and type the desired expansion output name.
Figure 111. New Expansion Output Name
3. Press the <Enter> key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new
output name. Press the <Down Arrow> to navigate to and highlight the next name field.
Figure 112. Renamed Expansion Output
NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Expansion output name.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
63
Expansion Output Processing
The expansion output processing chain in DSP Configurator is represented by a string
of blocks (see figure 113 below). Each block contains a specific processor or type of
processor. Each expansion output contains the following processor chain:
1. Expansion Output Trim Block
2. Expansion Output Delay Block
3. Expansion Output Filter Block
4. Expansion Output Dynamics Block
5. Expansion Output Attenuation Block
Figure 113. Expansion Output Processing Chain
Expansion Output Trim Block
Each expansion output contains a trim block. This block functions the same as the output
trim block (see Output Trim Block on page 59 for information on configuring the
expansion output trim block).
Expansion Output Delay Block
Each expansion output contains a delay block. This block functions the same as the
mic/line input delay block (see Input Delay Block on page 35 for information on
configuring the expansion output delay block).
Expansion Output Filter Block
Each expansion output contains a filter block. This block functions the same as the
mic/line input filter block, except that there are 10 slots for filters (see Input Filter Block on
page 24 for information on configuring expansion output filters).
Expansion Output Dynamics Block
Each expansion output contains a dynamics block. This block functions the same as the
mic/line input dynamics blocks (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 30 for information
on configuring the expansion output dynamic filter).
Expansion Output Attenuation Block
Each expansion output contains an attenuation block. This block functions the same as the
output attenuation block (see Output Attenuation Block on page 60 for information on
configuring the expansion output dynamic filter).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
64
Virtual Send Bus
The virtual send bus consists of mix points that allow inputs to be routed back to the virtual
return input panel for additional mixing and processing (see Virtual Returns on page 46).
NOTE: Virtual Send Bus mix-points are highlighted in green.
Figure 114. Virtual Send Bus Mix Points
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
65
Virtual Send channels cannot be routed to themselves. For example, Virtual Return A
may be routed to Virtual Return B via the virtual send bus, but Virtual Return A cannot
be routed to itself via the virtual send bus, and so on (see figure 115 below).
Figure 115. Virtual Send Bus for Virtual Returns
DMP 128 FlexPlus • DSP Configurator Software
66
Configuration Tools
This section contains information for configuring certain tools and options that are found
under the Tools menu in DSP Configurator and covers the following topics:
• Presets
• Firmware Loader
• Groups
• Organize Building Blocks
• Digital I/O
• Device Settings
• Players
• Options
• Macros
• Expansion Bus
• Device Manager
• Phone Dialer
• Connect to or Disconnect from Device
Presets
Preset options are available from the Tools menu.
Figure 116. Presets Options
1
Mark All Items — Marks all gain blocks, processor blocks, and mix-points in the main
workspace. Performing this function before saving a preset ensures every element in the
workspace is saved to the preset.
2
Save Preset — Saves the marked blocks and mix points of the current configuration
as a preset. When Save Preset is clicked, the following dialog box opens saying that
only the elements marked with a green outline are saved to the preset (see figure 117
below). This option is only available if items are marked.
Figure 117. Preset Save Message
3
Clear Marked Items — Unmarks all currently marked elements.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
67
Methods for Marking Items
Marked items are highlighted in green (see figure 118 below). There are four ways to mark
items in DSP Configurator:
•
Mark All — Press <Ctrl+A> on the keyboard to mark all items in the main workspace.
•
Mark Group — Click and drag the cursor to create a box around a group of items
to mark them. Click and drag the cursor while holding the <Shift> key to create box
around another group of items to mark them while keeping previous group marked.
•
Mark Series — Click the first item in the series to mark it, then press <Shift+Click> on
the final item in the series. All items between the first and last items are marked.
•
Mark Multiple Individual – Click the first item to mark it and press <Ctrl+Click> to
mark additional items anywhere in the main workspace.
Figure 118. Marked Items Highlighted in Green
Configuring Presets
1. Create a configuration to be saved as a preset (see DSP Configurator Software on
page 10).
2. Mark the items that will be included in the preset.
3. Select Tools > Presets > Save Preset.
4. From the Save a Preset dialog box, enter the preset number (1 through 32) in the
Preset Number field (see figure 119, 1 below). Preset slots that do not already have
a preset assigned read [unassigned]. Enter a name into the Preset Name field (2, 12
character maximum).
5. Click OK (3) to save the preset.
Figure 119. Save a Preset Dialog Box
NOTE: When a configuration file is pushed to a DMP 128 FlexPlus, presets
contained within that file are available for recall from DSP Configurator or SIS
commands.
6. The preset is saved and is available from the Presets drop-down menu at the top of the
main workspace.
Figure 120. Presets Drop-Down
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
68
Groups
Groups allow master control of Gain, Mute, Bass, Treble, and Loudness for groups of
channels. Groups are used in macros, ACP panels, and other control configurations.
Click Tools > Configure Groups to open the Configure Groups dialog box.
1 Select Group
2 Select Control Type
3 Available Group Members
4 Change Name Button
5 Apply Button
6 Delete Current Group Button
7 Close Button
Figure 121. Group Controls Dialog Box
1
Select Group — Provides a drop-down menu to select the number of the group to
be configured. If the group has been configured and named, the group name appears
next to the group number. If the group slot is empty, it reads <empty> next to the group
number. There are 64 group slots available.
2
Select Control Type — Group controls can manage Gain, Mute, Bass, Treble, or
Loudness for the specified inputs, mix-points, or outputs. From the Select Control
Type panel, select the type of control from the Gain, Mute, Bass, or Treble lists.
NOTE: Bass and Treble are only available if the Bass and Treble filters are inserted
on a channel and only allow channels with the filters to be placed in a group.
3
Available Group Members — This section populates according to the selected
control type and lists all inputs, mix-points, and outputs available to be added as group
members. Check the box next to a member to add it to the group. Group members
must be the same control type. The maximum number of group members for a single
group is 128.
NOTE: Loudness processors can be selected from input and output gain stages.
4
Change Name Button — Once a group has been created, select it from the Select
Group drop‑down menu (1), click Change Name to change the name of the selected
group.
5
Apply Button — Click Apply after changes to a group have been made. The Confirm
Group Details dialog box opens allowing the group name and number to be edited.
Click OK to apply group changes.
6
Delete Current Group Button — Select a group from the Select Group drop‑down
menu and click Delete Current Group to delete the group.
7
Close Button — Click Close to close the dialog box. Any changes that have not been
applied will be lost.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
69
Configuring Groups
To create a new group:
1. Select Tools > Configure Groups to open the Configure Groups dialog box.
2. From the Select Group drop-down, select a group slot to configure (see figure 122, 1
below).
3. From the Select Control Type panel (2), expand a control type.
4. Choose which gain stage the control type affects.
5. From the Available Group Members panel, select the channels to be configured as
group members (3).
6. Click Apply (4).
Figure 122. Configure Groups Dialog Box
7. Confirm the group number and name from the Confirm Group Details dialog box (see
figure 123, 5 below).
8. Click OK to confirm all details and create the group (6).
Figure 123. Confirm Group Details Dialog Box
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
70
To edit an existing group:
1. Select Tools > Configure Groups to open the Configure Groups dialog box (see figure
124 below).
2. From the Select Group drop-down (1), select an existing group to edit.
3. From the Select Control Type panel (2), expand a control type.
4. Choose which gain stage to edit.
5. From the Available Group Members panel (3), select or deselect channels that will be
members of the group.
6. Click Apply (4).
7. From the Confirm Group Details dialog box, the group number and group name can
be edited (5).
8. Click OK to confirm the group details (6).
9. When the Overwrite Group dialog box opens, click OK to confirm the changes made to
the group.
To edit only a group name or group number:
1. Choose the group from the Select Group drop-down (1).
2. Click Change Name (7).
3. From the Change Group Name dialog box, enter the new group number or group name
into the respective fields (5).
4. Click OK (6).
Figure 124. Editing a Group
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
71
Digital I/O
The DMP 128 FlexPlus rear panel has two sets of digital I/O ports (see figure 2, J on
page 5). Each set has one digital input and one digital output. These digital I/O ports can
be configured from DSP Configurator. The Configure Digital I/O dialog box allows the
user to select from a list of actions, then have the script complied and implemented on the
device.
Each of the digital I/O sets has two panels for configuration. One panel for Digital In and
one for Digital Out. The Digital In panel contains a drop-down for the action and a
drop-down for the element being acted upon. Digital Out 1 contains drop-down menus
for the mode and the input being acted upon.
Click Tools > Configure Digital I/O to open the Configure Digital I/O dialog box.
1 Digital In Panel
2 Digital Out 1 Panel
3 Reset All Button
4 Close Button
Figure 125. Configure Digital I/O Dialog Box
1
Digital In Panel — Provides the following configuration options for the digital input.
a. Status LED — Displays the current status of the digital input. When the input is
high, the LED lights green. When the input is low, the LED is black. When DSP
Configurator is in Emulate mode, the LED is gray.
b. Action Drop-Down — Provides a list of actions for the digital input to trigger,
depending on the status of the digital input.
c. Acting Upon Drop-Down — Provides a list of inputs, groups, macros, and
presets for the action to affect.
2
Digital Out 1 Panel — Provides the following configuration options for the digital
output.
a. Mode Drop-Down — Provides a list of modes for the first digital output.
b. Acting Upon Drop-Down — Provides a list of inputs, groups, macros, and
presets for the mode to affect.
3
4
Reset All Button — Resets all I/O configuration data to default.
Close Button — Closes the dialog box, retaining the configuration data.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
72
Configuring Digital I/O
1. In the Digital In panel, select an action from the Action drop-down.
Figure 126. Selecting Digital In Action
2. From the Acting upon drop-down, select the input, group, preset, or macro affected by
the action.
Figure 127. Selecting Digital In Acting Upon
3. From the Digital Out 1 panel, select a mode for the digital output from the Mode
drop‑down.
Figure 128. Selecting Digital Out 1 Mode
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
73
4. From the Digital In 1 Acting upon drop-down, select an input, group, preset, or
macro affected by the mode.
Figure 129. Selecting Digital Out 1 Acting Upon
5. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for additional Digital I/O configurations.
6. Click Close to close the Configure Digital I/O dialog box.
7. To save the Digital I/O configuration, click File > Save or press <Ctrl+S> and choose a
location to save the configuration file.
To push the Digital I/O configuration to a DMP 128 FlexPlus:
Connect to a DMP 128 FlexPlus in Live mode (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 17)
and follow the steps in Configuring Digital I/O on page 73. Changes made in the
Configure Digital I/O dialog box when connected Live are applied directly to the DMP
128 FlexPlus.
-or1. Follow the follow the steps in Configuring Digital I/O on page 73 while in Emulate
mode.
2. Connect to a DMP 128 FlexPlus in Live mode and perform a configuration file push (see
Live and Emulate Panel on page 17).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
74
Players
The Configure Players dialog box allows the user to upload audio files to a
DMP 128 FlexPlus and is available when connected Live to the device. Once the audio file
is uploaded, it may be assigned to one of eight players. Configured players may then be
assigned to any of the Aux inputs and routed to the desired output for audio file playback
(see Aux Inputs on page 41).
1 Files in the Device
2 Add File to Device Button
3 Remove File from Device Button
4 Players
5 Start Player Button
6 Stop Player Button
7 Clear Player Button
Figure 130. Configure Players Dialog Box
1
Files in the Device — Lists the audio files stored on the DMP 128 FlexPlus. The file
names and extensions are listed in the Filename column, with the size of the file listed in
the Size (KB) column.
NOTE: Default files in the device are white noise, pink noise, and sine wave.
2
Add File to Device Button — Opens the Select Audio file to load to device
dialog box where an audio file is selected to load onto the DMP 128 FlexPlus.
NOTES:
• Only .wav, .mp3, .wma, .aiff, .aac, and .raw audio file types are accepted.
• All audio files are converted to .raw at a 48 kHz sampling rate when uploaded
to the DMP 128 FlexPlus.
• File names containing spaces are not accepted.
3
4
Remove File from Device Button — Removes the selected file from the device.
5
Start Player Button — Starts playing the audio file assigned to the selected player.
Players — Contains 8 players that can have audio files assigned to them. Each player
contains a Repeat check box that repeats the audio file until Stop Player is selected.
The Repeat Delay field specifies the number of seconds between each repeat of the
audio file. To assign an audio file from the device to one of the 8 players, click and drag
the desired audio file to the desired player. The filename of the player changes from
[unassigned] to the name of the file assigned to the player.
NOTE: This button is only available when the player is inserted into the Aux input
(see Aux Inputs on page 41 for more information).
6
7
Stop Player Button — Stops playing the audio file assigned to the selected player.
Clear Player Button — Removes the assigned audio file from the selected player, but
does not remove it from the device. Player reverts to [unassigned].
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
75
Configuring Players
To upload an audio file:
1. Enter Live mode to connect to a DMP 128 FlexPlus (see Live and Emulate Panel on
page 17).
2. Click Tools > Configure Players.
3. From the Configure Players dialog box, click Add File to Device (see
figure 130, 2 on the previous page).
4. From the Select Audio file to load to device dialog box, locate the desired audio
file and select it (see figure 131, 1 below).
NOTE: File names containing spaces are not accepted.
5. Click Open (2).
Figure 131. Selecting an Audio File to Upload
6. A Loading... status bar appears in the menu status field at the top of the main
workspace. When the file is loaded successfully, the field reads File Loaded
Successfully!
Figure 132. Loading Bar and File Uploaded Successfully
7. Click OK in the Upload Complete dialog box.
Figure 133. Upload Complete Dialog Box
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
76
To assign an audio file to a player:
1. Select the audio file from the Files in the device panel.
2. Click and drag the audio file to the desired player (pink_noise_m20dB_10sec.raw is
being assigned to Player 1 in figure 134 below).
3. When the file has been assigned to a player, the player Filename field displays the name
of the audio file assigned.
Figure 134. Assigning Audio File to Players
To start, stop, or clear a player:
1. Click a player with an audio file assigned to it (see figure 135, 1 below).
2. Check the Repeat checkbox (2) to repeat the audio file after it has been played
(optional).
3. Enter the amount of time in seconds the player should wait before repeating the file in
the Repeat Delay field (3) (optional).
4. Click Start Player (4).
NOTE: The player must be assigned to an Aux input before Start Player and Stop
Player are available (see Aux Input Gain Block on page 42).
5. To stop the player, highlight the player with a single click, then click Stop Player (5).
6. To clear the player of its audio file, highlight the player with a single click, then click
Clear Player (6).
Figure 135. Starting, Stopping, and Clearing Players
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
77
Macros
Macros are sets of actions that can affect the local DMP 128 FlexPlus and other Extron
products on the same TCP/IP network. They can be configured in Emulate or Live mode
via an Ethernet connection only, and they can be saved to a configuration file or pushed to
DMP 128 FlexPlus internal memory. Macros are comprised of up to 32 actions that occur in
sequence to quickly configure a system for specific applications.
Figure 136. Configure Macros Dialog Box
1
Select Macro Drop-Down — Select an empty macro slot to configure or select an
existing macro to edit from this drop-down menu.
2
Change Name Button — Click this button to enter a new name for a previously
configured macro. Press <Enter> to confirm the macro name change.
3
Macro Configuration Form — Up to 32 actions can be configured in this form. When
one action is configured, a new line appears to configure the next action in the macro.
4
Delete Current Macro Button — Deletes the macro currently selected from the
Select Macro drop-down.
5
6
Clone Macro Button — Clones the currently selected macro to a new macro slot.
7
Edit Remote Destinations Button — Opens the dialog box to edit data for remote
devices being configured by the actions in a macro. Remote devices in the network
can also be added from this dialog box (see the Configure Macros topic in the
DSP Configurator Help file). This is only available when connected in Live mode.
8
Push Macros to Device Button — Pushes all macros to a connected
DMP 128 FlexPlus. Once the macros are on the device, they can be run by control
systems or DSP Configurator. This button is only available when connected Live to a
DMP 128 FlexPlus (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 17).
9
Power-on Macro Drop-Down — Select an existing macro to run whenever the
DMP 128 FlexPlus is powered on.
¢
Close Button — Closes the Configure Macros dialog box, retaining macros that have
been created or edited. Actions that have not been completely configured show a
symbol to the left of the Destination field in the macro configuration form. Actions
symbol are not saved when the dialog box is closed.
showing the
Run Macro Button — Runs the macro currently selected from Select Macro
drop‑down, performing all of the configured actions in sequential order. This is only
available when connected to a DMP 128 FlexPlus in Live mode via the LAN or VoIP 1
port.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
78
Configuring a Macro
1. Click Tools > Configure Macros. The Configure Macros dialog box opens.
2. Select an empty macro slot from the Select Macro drop-down.
3. From the Destination drop-down, select a destination for the macro action. Choose
Local for the local DMP 128 FlexPlus, or Add Destination... for a remote destination.
If choosing Local, proceed to step 4.
NOTE: Macro commands can only be sent to remote destinations via the
LAN/VoIP 1 port (V-model only).
a. After selecting Add Destination..., the Edit Remote Destinations dialog box
opens.
b. Complete the form in the dialog box, including username and password, if required.
c. Select Apply to add the device to the drop-down in the Destinations column.
d.
Click Close to close the Edit Remote Destinations dialog box.
e. Select the newly created remote destination from the Destination drop-down.
4. From the Action drop-down, select an action to be configured.
•
Recall Preset — Recall an existing preset.
•
Set Group Gain — Set the level of an existing gain group.
•
Group Gain Inc/Dec — Set the increment/decrement values of an existing gain
group.
•
Set Group Mute — Mute or unmute an existing mute group.
•
Gain — Set the gain of a specific gain block on a specific channel.
•
Mute — Mute or unmute a specific gain block on a specific channel.
•
Set Phantom Power – Enable or disable phantom power on a specific
Mic/Line input channel.
•
Meters On/Off — Enable or disable level meters at the input gain or output
attenuation stages of a specific channel.
•
Start Player — Starts a selected player.
•
Stop Player — Stops a selected player.
•
SIS Command — Type in a single SIS command to perform an action not listed
above (see Remote Communication and Control on page 126).
NOTE: Use the W key in place of E and the | (pipe) key in place of }.
•
Set Input Format — Specify whether mic/line inputs receive analog signal from the
inputs or digital signal via the Dante network (see 9 in figure 40 on page 23).
•
Dial Number — Use a specific VoIP line to dial a string.
•
Dial Digits — Use a specific VoIP line and line appearance to dial a predetermined
number, such as an extension number or conference pin.
•
End Call — End calls on a specific line or all appearances of a VoIP line.
5. Once the action is chosen, up to four additional selections are made available. These
additional selections must be completed in order to proceed to the next macro step.
For example, if Set Group Gain is the selected action, Selection 1 prompts the
selection of a gain group to be affected and Selection 2 determines the gain level of
the selected group.
6. When all of the action selections are configured, a new line appears at the bottom of the
form so another action can be configured.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
79
7. From the Next Command drop-down, select whether the DMP 128 FlexPlus waits for
an SIS response from each action before executing the next action in the macro or
executes the next command immediately without waiting for an SIS response. The
default is Execute immediately. Responses can be viewed through Extron Dataviewer
and follow SIS response syntax (see DSP SIS Commands on page 145).
a. Use the Delay field to enter the amount of delay in seconds. The default is 0.000
seconds of delay.
8. Click Change Name at the top of the dialog box and enter a new name for the macro in
the Select Macro text field. Default macro names are Macro 1, Macro 2, and so on.
9. Up to 32 actions can be configured per macro. Follow steps 3 through 7 to configure
additional actions. Right click the left-most field in an action to cut, copy, or paste
actions in a macro.
10. Connect Live to the DMP 128 FlexPlus and click Push Macro to Device to push it
to the DMP 128 FlexPlus. Once the macro has been pushed, it can be run via DSP
Configurator, a control system, or SIS commands.
NOTES:
• A macro cannot be run until it is pushed to the device. Edits made to an existing
macro must also be pushed to the device.
• Macro configuration data is saved on a per-line basis. When an action is completely
configured, the data is saved even if the Configure Macros dialog box is closed.
• Macro configurations are saved when the DSP Configurator configuration file is
saved.
• If DSP Configurator is closed without saving the configuration file or pushing the
macro to a DMP 128 FlexPlus, unsaved macro configuration data is deleted.
To delete a Macro:
1. Click Tools > Configure Macros.
2. From the Select Macro drop-down, choose the macro to be deleted.
3. Once the macro information is displayed, click Delete Current Macro in the bottom left
corner of the Configure Macros dialog box.
To clone a Macro:
1. Click Tools>Configure Macros.
2. From the Select Macro drop-down, choose the macro to be cloned.
3. Click Clone Macro at the bottom of the Configure Macros dialog box.
4. Use the drop-down in the Clone Macro dialog to select a destination for the cloned
macro. By default, the next empty macro slot is selected as the destination.
NOTE: If a macro already exists in the selected destination, a warning message
appears below the drop-down, warning that the existing macro will be overwritten
with the cloned macro.
5. Click OK to clone the macro or Cancel to cancel the action.
6. After the macro is cloned, the new macro is displayed in the Configure Macros dialog
box. The cloned macro has a default macro name.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
80
To run a Macro:
1. Connect to the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Live mode (see Live and Emulate Panel on
page 17).
2. Click Tools > Configure Macros.
3. From the Select Macro drop-down, choose the macro to be run.
4. Once the macro information is displayed, click Run Macro.
-or1. Connect to the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Live mode (see Live and Emulate Panel on
page 17).
2. Select the macro to be run from the Run Macro drop-down in the tool bar.
Figure 137. Run Macro Drop-Down
To edit remote destinations:
1. Click Edit Remote Destinations from the Configure Macros dialog box.
2. Select an existing device from the Unique Device Name drop-down.
3. Edit the information for the device or click Delete to remove the selected device.
4. Click Apply to save changes made to the remote destination.
5. Click Close to close the Edit Remote Destinations dialog box.
NOTE: See step 3 on page 79 for information regarding adding a destination.
Manipulating Macro Actions
After a macro action has been fully configured, it can be cut, copied, pasted, inserted, or
deleted. Right-click the left-most box in the action line item (see figure 136, 3 on page 78)
and select an option from the drop-down menu.
Figure 138. Macro Action Manipulation Drop-Down
To cut a macro action:
1. Right click the box furthest to the left in the action list item to be cut.
2. Select Cut. The action is removed from the list and placed in the clipboard.
To copy a macro action:
1. Right click the box furthest to the left in the action list item to be copied.
2. Select Copy. The action is copied to the clipboard.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
81
To paste a macro action:
1. Right click the box furthest to the left in the action list item where the action is to be
pasted.
2. Select Paste. The action is copied to the list item. Any existing action data is
overwritten.
To insert a macro action:
1. Cut or copy a macro action to be inserted.
2. Right click the box furthest to left in the action list item directly below where the action in
the clipboard is to be inserted.
3. Select Insert. The action is inserted from the clipboard above the action that was right
clicked in step 1.
To delete a macro action:
1. Right click the box furthest to the left in the action to be deleted.
2. Click Delete.
Configure USB Audio
The Configure USB Audio option opens the Configure USB Audio dialog. This dialog
provides the ability to define the number of input and output USB channels which interface
with a computer. It also provides the ability to connect the output volume and mute controls
of a computer with the DMP 128 FlexPlus
Figure 139. Configure USB Audio Dialog
Selecting USB Audio Channel Configuration
To select an active USB audio channel configuration, choose the desired configuration from
the Current USB Channel Configuration: drop-down.
NOTES:
• Changing a USB audio channel configuration will remove deactivated USB
channels.
• Previous settings are not retained when changing the USB audio channel
configuration.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
82
Creating and Assigning USB Input Audio Control Groups
To assign the Input Audio Control Groups in the Configure USB Audio dialog, first create
USB Input control groups (see Aux Inputs on page 41).
Creating USB Input Audio Control Groups
To create a USB Input Gain Group, open the Configuration Groups dialog and assign the
mic/line input or pre-mixer gain of a USB L Aux channel and its respective USB R Aux
channel to a group.
To create a USB Input Mute Group, open the Configuration Groups dialog and assign the
mic/line input or pre-mixer mute of a USB L Aux channel and its respective USB R Aux
channel to a group.
NOTES:
• The number of recommended gain and mute groups will depend on the channel
configuration.
• It is recommended that the left and right channels of each USB audio channel are
added to exclusive control groups — one for gain and another for mute.
Assigning USB Input Audio Control Groups
To assign a USB gain group, use the Gain Group drop-down in the USB Input Audio
Control field to select the gain group containing the Aux Inputs with the previously
assigned USB L and R channels.
To assign a USB mute group, use the Mute Group drop-down in the USB Input Audio
Control field to select the mute group containing the Aux Inputs with the previously
assigned USB L and R channels.
NOTE: The number of input audio control groups available in the Gain or Mute
Group drop-down will depend on the channel configuration.
After all controls have been assigned, test the controls and make any adjustments to group
members or USB control selections in the Configure USB Audio dialog. Click Close to
close the dialog.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
83
Configure Internal Triggers
The Configure Internal Triggers option opens the Internal Trigger Setup dialog. This
dialog allows for the configuration, testing, and application of internal triggers.
NOTE: The Configure Internal Triggers option is only available when
connected Live to a VoIP-enabled audio product with a TCP/IP connection.
Figure 140. Internal Trigger Setup Dialog
Configuring an Internal Trigger
Multiple triggers can be configured in this dialog, but each trigger must be completely
configured before the next line appears in the configuration form.
To configure an internal trigger:
1. From the Trigger column, select the desired trigger to initiate the action.
2. From the first Type column, select the line to be associated with the selected trigger.
3. From the second Type column, select the specific line appearance to be associated
with the selected trigger.
4. From the Action column, choose a macro to be run when the selected action is
registered on the selected line appearance. After this selection is made, the next line in
the internal trigger form appears.
Deleting an Internal Trigger
After an internal trigger is configured, click the box to the left of the Trigger column and
click the Delete Current button to delete that row from the internal trigger form.
Testing a Trigger
To test a trigger action by simulating a run trigger:
1. Connect to the host device in Live mode with a TCP/IP connection.
2. Click the box to the left of the Trigger column on the trigger to be tested.
3. Click the Run Trigger button to verify the selected macro in the Action column runs
as expected.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
84
Pushing Internal Triggers to a Host Device
When internal triggers are configured in Emulate mode and the configuration file is pushed
to a device, the internal triggers are also pushed to the device.
When configuring internal triggers in Live mode, click the Set Triggers button to push the
internal triggers to the connected device with a TCP/IP connection.
Device Manager
Device Manager is used to configure and switch between multiple devices in Live or
Emulate mode within DSP Configurator (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 17).
Devices can be placed and ordered in user-created folders for easily tracking systems with
devices across multiple rooms. When Device Manager contains multiple devices, all device
configurations are saved in a single DSP Configurator file.
Select Tools > Device Manager to open the Device Manager dialog box.
1 Add Device Button
2 Clone Device Button
3 Remove Device Button
4 Expand and Collapse All Buttons
5 New Folder Button
6 Device List Panel
Figure 141. Device Manager Dialog Box
1
Add Device Button — Click the
button to open the DSP Configurator splash
screen to select another device to be configured. As a device is chosen or connected, it
is added to the Device Manager dialog box.
2
Clone Device Button —Click the
button to clone the currently selected device.
When a device is cloned, information within the device configuration file is also cloned.
NOTE: If Live mode is enabled, a backup may need to be performed before the
device can be successfully cloned.
3
Remove Device Button — Click the
button to remove the currently selected
device from the device manager. Select a folder and click this button to delete the folder
and all devices it contains.
4
Expand and Collapse All Buttons — Click the
icon to expand all folders and
show the devices it contains. Click the
to collapse all folders.
5
New Folder Button — Click the
button to create a new folder to drag a device into.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
85
6
Device List Panel — Lists the devices and folders in Live and Emulate mode. From
this panel, devices can be clicked and dragged into folders, placed in custom order, and
folders can be renamed. If the device is connected via LAN, the device IP is displayed.
Double-clicking a device in this list will initiate a pull (see Connect to a
DMP 128 FlexPlus in Live Mode on page 17).
The color of the icon next to a device name indicates Live or Emulate status, as well as
whether the device is configured as a Primary or Secondary EXP device. Devices with
color icons are in Live mode. Devices with grayed icons are in Emulate mode. Devices
with blue icons are configured as Secondary units (see Expansion Bus on page 98).
Managing Devices in Device Manager
To add a device:
1. Click Tools > Device Manager to open the Device Manager dialog box.
2. Click the Add Device button (see figure 142, 1 below).
Figure 142. Adding a Device
3. From the DSP Configurator splash screen drop-down, select the device to be added
to Device Manager (see figure 143, 2 below). Select Connect... to open the Connect
to device... dialog box and directly connect with a device. When connecting directly,
DSP Configurator performs a pull of the newly connected device configuration.
4. Click OK (3).
Figure 143. Selecting a Device to be Added
To arrange devices into a folder:
1. From the Device Manager dialog box, click the New Folder button (see figure 144, 1
on the following page).
2. Enter a name for the folder. The text for the folder name is automatically highlighted and
ready to be edited (2).
NOTE: Folders can be renamed later by clicking twice on the folder name and
editing the text.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
86
3. Press <Enter>.
4. Click and drag devices over the folder name and release to insert the devices into a
folder (3).
Figure 144. Arranging Devices Into a Folder
Connect to or Disconnect from Device
When DSP Configurator is in Emulate mode, this selection in the Tools menu reads
Connect to Device and opens the Connect to device... dialog box when selected.
When DSP Configurator is in Live mode and connected to a device, this selection reads
Disconnect from Device and disconnects DSP Configurator from the current device when
selected, and returns to Emulate mode.
For detailed instructions on connecting to a DMP 128 FlexPlus, see Connect to a DMP
128 FlexPlus in Live Mode on page 17. For detailed instructions on disconnecting from
a DMP 128 FlexPlus, see Exit Live Mode and Enter Emulate Mode on page 19.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
87
Firmware Loader
Select Tools > Firmware Loader to open the Extron Firmware Loader software from
DSP Configurator. Firmware Loader assists users in updating firmware or uploading new
firmware to devices via RS-232, USB, or TCP/IP connection. Refer to the Firmware Loader
Help file for more information in using the Firmware Loader software.
NOTES:
• Extron Firmware Loader software must be installed on the host PC in order for it to
be opened.
• TCP/IP connection is recommended for updating firmware.
Downloading Firmware Updates
1. Go to www.extron.com and click the Download tab at the top of the page (see
figure 145, 1 below).
2. From the Download page, select the Firmware link (2) near the middle of the page.
Figure 145. Download Page and Firmware Link
3. The Firmware link opens the firmware Download Center page. Click the D from the
alphabet list at the top of the page (see figure 146, 3 below).
4.
Select the Download link (4) at the right side of the DMP 128 FlexPlus listing.
Figure 146. Download Center and Firmware Link
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
88
5. After clicking the Download link, select Run from the next page to run the firmware
installer (see figure 147, 5 below). Alternatively, select Save (6) to save the firmware
installer and install the firmware at a later time.
Figure 147. Firmware Installer Run or Save
6. Once the installer has been run, the Firmware Upgrade dialog box opens, click Next to
begin the installation process (see figure 148, 6 below).
Figure 148. Firmware Upgrade InstallShield
7. The terms of installation must be agreed to. Select the I accept... radio button (see
figure 149, 7 on the next page).
8. Click Next (8).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
89
Figure 149. Firmware License Agreement
9. An installation status dialog box opens that displays the completion status of firmware
download and installation.
10. When the firmware is installed, the Firmware Upgrade dialog box displays that the
installation is complete and the install location of the firmware file. By default, firmware is
installed in:
Program Files > Extron > Firmware > DMP_128_FlexPlus > vx.xx
If the View Firmware Release Notes checkbox is checked (see figure 150, 9 below), a
PDF of the firmware release notes opens automatically. The box is checked by default.
Click Finish to close the dialog box (¢).
Figure 150. Firmware Installed Dialog Box
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
90
Organize Building Blocks
Extron building blocks are a quick configuration tool that can significantly reduce
configuration time. A building block is a collection of processor and gain settings for an input
or output processing chain. Building blocks have been built by Extron based on extensive
use and testing with each intended application or specific device. The Organize Building
Blocks dialog box allows users to organize building blocks to their preference, import new
building blocks, export existing building blocks, delete building blocks, and restore default
building blocks that may have been deleted by the user. Building blocks in the Organize
Building Blocks dialog are organized into folders for easily locating building blocks for a
multitude of applications.
Select Tools > Organize Building Blocks to open the Organize Building Blocks dialog
box.
1 Export Building Blocks File Button 4 Restore Default Building Blocks Button
2 Import Building Blocks File Button 5 New Folder Button
3 Delete Building Block Button
6 Building Blocks Panel
Figure 151. Organize Building Blocks Dialog Box
1
Export Building Blocks File Button — Click the
building block file to be saved to a disk.
button to export the selected
NOTE: Building block files have an XML extension.
2
Import Building Blocks File Button — Click the
button to browse the computer
for building block files to import to DSP Configurator.
3
Delete Building Block Button — Click the
building block.
button to delete the currently selected
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
91
4
Restore Default Building Blocks Button — If default building blocks that come
installed with DSP Configurator are deleted, click the
button to restore them.
NOTE: Only the default building blocks can be restored with this function. User
created building blocks are not restored if deleted.
TIP:
To avoid accidentally deleting user created building block files, once they are
created, export them to a safe location on the disk. This creates a backup copy of
the building block file, should it be deleted by the user by mistake.
5
New Folder Button — Click the
button to create a new folder that building blocks
can be dragged into. Upon creation, a default folder name is highlighted and a custom
name can be entered. Click a folder name twice to edit the folder name.
6
Building Blocks Panel — This panel contains folders and building blocks. Click and
drag building blocks to change their order or place them inside folders. Click a building
block name twice to edit the building block name. Click a folder name twice to edit the
name of the folder.
Device Settings
The Device Settings dialog box provides access to general settings of the
DMP 128 FlexPlus. Select Tools > Device Settings to open the Device Settings dialog
box. Device settings are only available when connected live to a device.
Within the Device Settings dialog box, the following tabs are available:
• Unit Info
• IP Settings
• Passwords
• Serial Settings
• Date/Time
• USB Audio
• Dante Device
Unit Info
The Unit Info tab displays the unit name, firmware version, device model, device part
number, and device MAC address. Click in the Unit Name field to rename the device within
the listed naming parameters. Click Apply to save the changes.
Figure 152. Unit Info Tab
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
92
IP Settings
The IP Settings tab allows the user to view and edit the IP address, gateway IP address,
subnet mask, and DHCP status of the unit. The checkbox to the left of each parameter
must be checked before any changes can be made to that parameter. Click Apply to save
the changes.
NOTES:
• Changing DHCP from On to Off resets the IP address to the factory default
(192.168.254.254).
• These settings apply to the port marked LAN (non-V model) or LAN 1 (V-model).
Figure 153. IP Settings Tab
Passwords
The Passwords tab allows the user to create or edit user and administrator passwords. An
administrator password must be created in order to create a user password. The checkbox
to the left of the password type (Admin or User) must be checked before creating or editing
passwords. Click Apply to save the changes.
NOTES:
• Passwords only apply to IP connections and can be up to 12 characters in
length.
• The factory configured password for this device has been set to the device
serial number. Passwords are case sensitive.
Figure 154. Passwords Tab
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
93
Serial Settings
The Serial Settings tab allows users to change the baud rate of the rear panel RS-232
port. Click Apply to save the changes.
NOTE: The recommended baud rate for the DMP 128 FlexPlus is 38400.
Figure 155. Serial Settings Tab
Date/Time
To set the date and time:
1. Click the Set Local button to sync the date and time information with the date and time
on the connected PC.
2. Set the time zone by using the Zone drop-down.
3. Use the Daylight Savings radio buttons to enter the
daylight saving region, or leave off (default).
-or1. Click on the Set Date and Time check box.
2. Enter the desired date in the Date field. A drop-down
calendar is available for date selection.
3. Enter the desired time in the Time field by clicking on
the hours and entering the hour, then clicking on the
minutes and entering the number of minutes.
4. Set the time zone by using the Zone drop-down.
Figure 156. Date/Time Tab
5. Use the Daylight Savings radio buttons to enter the
daylight saving region, or leave off (default).
NOTE: The information displayed in the Date/Time tab is static. In order to update the
information to reflect the current time, click Refresh.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
94
figu
USB Audio
The USB Audio tab allows for customizing USB audio interface names and terminal types.
To configure USB Audio settings in DSP Configurator:
NOTE: Extron recommends configuring these settings before connecting USB audio
devices to a PC.
1. Connect to the device (Connect to or Disconnect from Device on page 87).
2. From the Tools menu, select Device Settings. The Device Settings dialog box
opens.
3. Click on the USB Audio tab.
4. In the USB Name field, enter the desired name for the USB Audio interface.
5. (Optional for C models only) In the USB Terminal Type panel, choose the desired
appearance of the USB Audio interface. This will change the appearance of the
interface within the Windows audio settings.
•
Echo Cancelling Speakerphone
•
Speakerphone
Figure 157. USB Audio Tab
6. Connect the USB audio port to the PC.
7. Click Apply to activate the new settings.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
95
8. Navigate to the Windows Sound settings and select the previously named DMP USB
Audio interface.
Figure 158. Windows Sound Settings
Troubleshooting USB Audio
Extron recommends configuring any USB Audio devices before connecting them to a PC.
Windows will remember similar devices and settings that were connected in the past and
problems may occur with the displayed device names within the Windows audio settings.
If these problems occur, attempt the following:
1. Open Windows Device Manager.
2. Remove any unused DMP Plus USB audio devices by right-clicking on the name and
selecting Uninstall.
If the problem persists after performing the above steps, it may be necessary to
remove hidden device entries as well.
To remove hidden device entries:
1. Open Device Manager in Windows.
2. In the Menu bar, click View.
3. Click Show Hidden Devices.
4. Repeat step 2 in the previous list.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
96
Dante Device
This tab allows the DMP 128 FlexPlus Dante settings to be configured within DSP
configurator without opening Dante Controller.
ATTENTION: It is essential that a Dante device be named immediately after it is
connected to the Dante network and before audio connections with other devices are
established. Existing connections are removed when a device is renamed.
Dante Device Name
A Dante device can be renamed to identify the device on the
audio network.
To assign the Dante device name:
1. Select Tools > Device Settings.
2. Use the arrows to navigate to the Dante Device tab (see
figure 159, 1).
3. Click the Device name text box (2).
4. Enter a device name for the Dante interface.
5. Click Apply (3). A confirmation dialog box opens.
6. Click Yes, to confirm existing connections
will be removed after the name is changed.
Dante Device Network Settings
Figure 159. Dante Device Tab in
Device Settings Dialog
Box
To configure Dante network settings:
1. Select the DHCP or Static IP radio buttons (4). If using DHCP, the DMP 128 FlexPlus
Dante interface will be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server and Dante network
configuration is complete. If Static IP is selected, proceed to step 2.
2. Enter a valid network configuration into the respective fields.
3. Click Apply.
To reboot the Dante interface:
1. Click Reboot Dante (5). Only the Dante interface will reboot, not the entire
DMP 128 FlexPlus.
To refresh the device name and network configuration displayed:
1. Click Refresh (6) to have DSP Configurator refresh information from the DMP 128
FlexPlus Dante interface.
Redundant Mode
In redundant mode, the 2-port AT switch becomes separate Primary and Secondary ports
(see Redundant Configuration on page 118).
To enable redundant mode:
1. Click the Enable Redundant Mode checkbox.
2. By default, the DHCP radio button is selected to have the DHCP server assign a
redundant network configuration. If necessary, select the Static radio button and enter
the redundant network configuration in the text boxes that appear below.
NOTE: A valid redundant static network configuration must be entered.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
97
Options
The Options dialog box allows the user to edit and reset default options for
DSP Configurator color schemes, default processor and gain block behavior, as well as a
number of other settings. For a comprehensive overview of the Options dialog box, see the
DSP Configurator Help file.
Figure 160. Options Dialog Box
Expansion Bus
With the Extron Expansion (EXP) port, two EXP-enabled devices can be connected for
bidirectional streaming of up to 16 channels of audio. EXP inputs and outputs contain DSP
(see Expansion and AT Inputs on page 51 and Expansion Outputs on page 63).
Connecting the EXP Ports
When connecting a DMP 128 FlexPlus to another EXP-enabled device for EXP
communication, the DMP 128 FlexPlus is always set as the primary unit. The primary unit
serves as the master clock for all EXP audio communication. The other unit must be set as
a secondary unit in order for a connection to be established.
The following procedure describes how to set up a DMP 128 FlexPlus model with another
EXP‑enabled non-AT device for EXP communication (see Connecting a DMP 128
FlexPlus Device and an EXP-enabled non-AT Device on the next page).
NOTE: Two DMP 128 FlexPlus devices cannot be connected via the EXP port because
AT models can only be configured as a primary unit and cannot be set as a secondary
unit. Instead, use the rear panel AT switch to connect the two devices over a Dante
network (see Dante Controller on page 111).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
98
Connecting a DMP 128 FlexPlus Device and an EXP-enabled non-AT
Device
1. Connect Live to the DMP 128 FlexPlus.
2. Select Tools > Expansion Bus > Use Extron Expansion Bus for channels 33-48 (see
figure 161, 1). AT channels 33 through 48 now display as
Expansion Inputs 1 through 8 and Expansion Inputs 9 through 16 in the main
workspace (2).
NOTE: Dante channels 33 through 48 still appear in Dante controller, but are
inactive when being used for Expansion Inputs 1 through 16.
Figure 161. Enabling Expansion Inputs on DMP 128 FlexPlus
3. Connect Live to the DMP 128 Plus non-AT. If connecting a DTP CrossPoint, proceed to
step 5.
4. Select Tools > Expansion Bus and ensure Secondary Unit is selected.
NOTES:
• DMP 128 FlexPlus models cannot be configured as secondary units. This
means the DMP 128 Plus non-AT must be configured as a secondary unit.
• If both devices are configured as primary, an EXP connection cannot be
established.
5. Use a CAT 6 cable (such as the 1 foot cable included with the DMP 128 FlexPlus) to
connect the two rear panel EXP ports.
6. When the connection is established, the front panel EXP LED on the primary unit lights
steadily and the EXP LED on the secondary unit blinks rapidly.
NOTE: The DTP CrossPoint EXP LED is located on the rear panel next to the EXP
port.
7. Open the Tools menu from the DMP 128 FlexPlus main workspace and view the
Expansion Bus status software LED (see figure 162, 3). The LED lights green when
there is a valid connection.
Figure 162. Expansion Bus Software LED
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
99
Phone Dialer
The Phone Dialer dialog box is used for DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP line configuration and
testing. Click Tools>Phone Dialer to open the Phone Dialer dialog box.
NOTES:
• DSP Configurator must be connected Live to a DMP 128 FlexPlus V-model in order
for the Phone Dialer dialog to be opened.
• VoIP lines must be registered with the call server via the DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP
web page (see DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP Web Page on page 171).
1 Selected Line Information
2 Appearance Window
3 Line Selection Buttons
4 New Call Button
5 Hold Button
6 Number Field
7 Dialer Keypad
8 Auto Answer Configuration
Figure 163. Phone Dialer Dialog Box
1
Selected Line Information — Displays the line number, display name, extension
number, and registration status of the selected line.
2
Appearance Window — Displays line appearances configured in the
DMP 128 FlexPlus, line extension, call status, and call duration. Appearances must be
selected to place or receive calls on a specific appearance.
3
Line Selection Buttons — Click these buttons to select a line and make calls or
display corresponding line information. When a call is incoming on a specific line, the
corresponding button flashes red.
4
New Call Button — Click this button after selecting a line and appearance to dial a
number using the dialer keypad.
5
Hold Button — Click this button during a call to put the call on hold. Click it again to
take a call off hold.
6
Number Field — Displays the number dialed with the dialer keypad. Alternatively, click
this field and use the keyboard to dial a number.
7
Dialer Keypad — Contains software buttons for dialing when not in an active call and
sending DTMF signals to the far end while in an active call. The green “off hook” button
places a call after a number is dialed. The red “on hook” button ends a call on the
selected line and appearance. The Clear button clears the number field.
8
Auto Answer Configuration — Contains a checkbox and Ring Duration field. Select
the checkbox to enable auto answer on all appearances of the selected line (unchecked
by default). Use the Ring Duration field to enter the amount of time in seconds before
the line auto answers.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
100
Placing a Call with the Phone Dialer
NOTE: VoIP lines must be registered with the call server via the DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP
web page (see DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP Web Page on page 171) and assigned to
an Aux input and output (see Aux Inputs on page 41).
1. Select Tools>Phone Dialer. The Phone Dialer dialog opens.
2. Select a line using the Line buttons (see figure 163, 3 on the previous page).
3. Click New Call (4).
4. Enter the desired number or extension using the keypad (7). Alternatively, click the
number field (6) and type the desired number or extension using the keyboard.
5. Click the green “off hook” button on the keypad (7).
6. The appearance window (2) displays the status of the call.
7. Click Hold to place the call on hold. Click Hold again to return to the call.
8. Click the red “on hook” button to end the call.
Receiving a Call with the Phone Dialer
NOTE: VoIP lines must be registered with the call server via the DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP
web page (see DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP Web Page on page 171) and assigned to
an Aux input and output (see Aux Inputs on page 41).
1. Select Tools>Phone Dialer. The Phone Dialer dialog opens.
2. When a call is incoming, the corresponding Line button flashes red.
3. Click the Line button with the incoming call.
4. Highlight the appearance the call is on.
5. Click the green “off hook” button on the keypad.
6. Click the red “on hook” button to end the call.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Configuration Tools
101
Audio Control Panels
(ACP)
Extron Audio Control Panels (ACP) are configurable control interfaces for use with the DMP
128 FlexPlus. ACP panels connect to the rear panel ACP port of a DMP 128 FlexPlus
via a 4-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connector (see figure 2, D on page 5). Each ACP
panel includes two ACP ports that support both power and communication between the
DMP 128 FlexPlus and the ACP panel. This section includes the following topics:
•
ACP Panel Types
•
Panel ID #
•
ACP Panel Button Control Types
•
Using Multiple ACP Panels
•
Configuration Examples
ACP Panel Types
ACP panels work by affecting group master controls, preset recall, and macro triggers, all
of which must be configured on the DMP 128 FlexPlus prior to configuring the ACP panels.
The Configure ACPs dialog box presents a series of drop-down lists that populate with
group masters, presets, and macros, according to the selections made.
When the Configure ACPs dialog is launched, the user is first asked to select a panel from
the ACP Panel Type drop-down list. There are 10 models of ACP panel:
• ACP 100
• ACP 106 EU
• ACP 105 D
• ACP 106 MK
• ACP 105 EU
• ACP VC1 D
• ACP 105 MK
• ACP VC1 EU
• ACP 106 D
• ACP VC1 MK
After a panel type is selected, the Configure ACPs dialog displays an image of the selected
panel. The ACP 100 has six fully configurable buttons and a dedicated rotary volume knob.
The ACP 105 style panels (ACP 105 D, ACP 105 EU, and ACP 105 MK) have five fully
configurable buttons.
The ACP 106 style panels (ACP 106 D, 106 EU, and 106 MK) have six buttons. Two buttons
are dedicated to mute off/mute on, two are dedicated to volume down/volume up, and the
remaining two buttons are fully configurable.
The ACP VC1 style panels (ACP VC1 D, ACP VC1 EU, and ACP VC1 MK) have a dedicated
rotary volume knob and one fully configurable button.
All panels come with a default set of button labels. The ACP 100 also comes with additional
button labels that can be used to relabel the buttons for alternate applications (see the
ACP 100 Setup Guide for information on replacing buttons labels). Additional buttons for
the ACP 105, 106, and VC1 style panels can be ordered from www.extron.com (see the
respective Setup Guide or User Guide for information on replacing buttons).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Audio Control Panels
102
Panel ID #
Panel ID numbers (ID #) are used to identify ACP panels connected to the DMP 128
FlexPlus and are necessary for the panel to function. The ID # is set using the DIP switch
assembly on the physical ACP panel. Once the panel ID has been set on the physical
device, the ID is selected in the Configure ACPs dialog box when the panel is being
configured in DSP Configurator (for information on how to set the panel ID #, see the
corresponding ACP panel setup guide).
ACP Panel Button Control Types
Click on a button or rotary control within the panel image to select that button for
configuration. When selected, the button or control will turn yellow to indicate that it is
active for configuration, and the Configure ACPs dialog box will populate with a series of
drop‑down lists for that purpose. First, one of the following control types must be selected:
•
Fixed
•
Follow Selector
•
Selector-Vol/Mute
There are two basic control types: Action and Selector. Action controls can be either Fixed
or Follow Selector. A button with dedicated functionality, such as a rotary knob or dedicated
volume or mute buttons, can only be configured as an Action control type.
Fixed
Buttons configured with the Fixed control type perform an action that is tied to a fixed
group, preset, or macro, and is not affected by or dependent on selections made on other
buttons. When Fixed is selected, the Configure ACPs dialog populates with a series of
drop-down list selections shown in the table below. When a selection is made in the Action
list, the Configure ACPs dialog then populates with subsequent selections.
Action
Select 1
Select 2
LED Behavior
Group Mute On
Mute Master
—
Reflects Current State
Group Mute off
Mute Master
—
Reflects Current State
Group Mute Toggle
Mute Master
—
Reflects Current State
Group Volume Down
Volume Master
—
Reflects Current State
Group Volume Up
Volume Master
—
Reflects Current State
Group Vol Rotary
(ACP 100 and VC1 only)
Volume Master
—
Reflects Current State
Preset Recall
Preset
—
Reflects Current State
Preset Toggle
Preset 1
Preset 2
Lit press/Unlit release
Toggles Lit/Unlit
Macro Trigger
Macro
—
Lit press/Unlit release
Macro Toggle
Macro 1
Macro 2
Lit press/Unlit release
Toggles Lit/Unlit
Figure 164. Fixed Selection Table
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Audio Control Panels
103
Follow Selector
A button configured with the Follow Selector control type performs an action that is tied to
a volume group or a mute group, but is dependent on a Selector-Vol/Mute button to define
which group the button affects. The table below shows the drop-down list selections that
are available when Follow Selector is chosen as the control type.
Action
Group Mute On
Group Mute Off
Group Mute Toggle
Group Volume Down
Group Volume Up
Group Vol Rotary (ACP 100 and VC1 only)
Figure 165. Follow Selector Selection Table
Selector-Vol/Mute (Selector)
Buttons configured as a Selector-Vol/Mute define a gain or mute group. A Selector-Vol/Mute
button acts as a modifier for Follow Selector buttons or controls. For example, if a Follow
Selector button is configured to increase or decrease the volume of a group, a Selector
button defines which gain group is affected by the volume increase or decrease. Two or
more Selector buttons are necessary for Follow Selector buttons to function properly.
Button Labels
Each button can be labeled to match the control type or function assigned to the button. In
the Label text field on the right side of the Configure ACPs dialog box, type a name to aid in
identifying the function of each button.
Using Multiple ACP Panels
The two ports on the back of an ACP panel support power from and communication with
the host DMP 128 FlexPlus. Up to eight ACP panels can be daisy-chained together for more
demanding control needs.
NOTES:
• The DMP 128 FlexPlus rear-panel ACP port provides 6 W of power.
• Use an Extron PS 1220EB power supply or Extron 12 V desktop power supply
when additional power is required. Refer to the ACP panel setup guide for wiring
details.
Configuration Examples
ACP panels can be configured to meet a wide variety of control needs. The following
configuration procedures are examples of flexible configurations using the default buttons
that ship with the ACP panels. The two configuration examples are covered:
•
ACP 100 Configuration Example
•
ACP 106 Style Configuration Example
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Audio Control Panels
104
Create the following gain and mute groups from the Configure Groups dialog box (see
Configuring Groups on page 70).
•
Mute and Gain groups for all microphone channels.
•
Mute and Gain groups for all program channels.
•
Mute and Gain groups for each individual program source.
•
Mute group for all output attenuation blocks.
ACP 100 Configuration Example
1. From the DMP 128 FlexPlus main workspace in DSP Configurator, select
Tools > Configure ACP Panels. The Configure ACPs dialog box opens.
2. Select an empty tab from the top of the dialog box to build a new configuration (see
figure 166, 1 below).
3. From the ACP Panel Type drop-down, select ACP 100 (2). The Configure ACPs dialog
box populates with an ACP 100 graphic.
4. From the ID # drop-down menu (3), select the ID number that corresponds with the
bus ID set on the ACP 100 rear panel DIP switch assembly (see the ACP 100 Setup
Guide for information on setting the bus ID).
5. In the panel graphic on the left side of the Configure ACPs dialog box, the button
labeled MIC is highlighted (yellow). When a button is highlighted, it is selected for
configuration.
6. From the Control Type drop-down, choose Selector-Vol/Mute (4). On the right side
of the Configure ACPs dialog box, more configuration options appear.
a. From the Volume Master drop-down (5), select the gain group containing all
microphone source channels. This group must be created from the Configure
Groups dialog box before it can be selected from the drop-down (see Configuring
Groups on page 70).
b. From the Mute Master drop-down (6), select the mute group containing all
microphone source channels.
Figure 166. Starting ACP 100 Configuration
7. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled PRGM
(see figure 166, 7 above).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Audio Control Panels
105
8. From the Control Type drop-down, choose Selector-Vol/Mute (figure 166, 4).
a. From the Volume Master drop-down (5), select the gain group containing all
program source channels.
b. From the Mute Master drop-down (6), select the mute group containing all
program source channels.
9. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled
Source #1 (8).
10. From the Control Type drop-down (4), choose Selector-Vol/Mute.
a. From the Volume Master drop-down (5), select the gain group containing just the
first program source channels.
b. From the Mute Master drop-down (6), select the mute group containing just the
first program source channels.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for additional individual program sources using the SOURCE #2
and SOURCE #3 buttons (up to three program sources can be controlled with this
configuration).
12. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled MUTE
(see figure 167, 1 below).
13. From the Control Type drop-down (2), select either:
•
Fixed for the MUTE button to mute all output.
•
Follow Selector for the MUTE button to mute groups defined by a selector button.
If Fixed was chosen:
a. From the Action drop-down (3), select Group Mute Toggle.
b. From the Mute Master drop-down (4), select the mute group containing all output
channels.
c. From the LED Behavior drop-down (5), select Red reflects Mute On to turn the
button red when mute is engaged, or White reflects Mute On to turn the button
white when mute is engaged.
If Follow Selector was chosen:
a. From the Action drop-down (6), select Group Mute Toggle.
b. From the LED Behavior drop-down (7), select Red reflects Mute On to turn the
button red when mute is engaged, or White reflects Mute On to turn the button
white when mute is engaged.
Figure 167. Mute Button Configuration
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Audio Control Panels
106
14. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the VOL knob (see
figure 168, 1 below).
15. From the Control Type drop-down (2), choose Follow Selector.
Figure 168. Rotary Volume Knob Configuration
The ACP 100 panel is now fully configured. From this point, either:
•
Add additional ACP panel configurations.
•
Save the ACP panel configuration to the DSP Configurator configuration file (see Saving
and Pushing ACP Configurations on page 110).
•
Push the configurations to the DMP 128 FlexPlus (see Saving and Pushing ACP
Configurations on page 110).
ACP 106 Style Configuration Example
1. From the DMP 128 FlexPlus main workspace in DSP Configurator, select
Tools > Configure ACP Panels. The Configure ACPs dialog box opens.
2. Select an empty tab from the top of the dialog box to build a new configuration (see
figure 169, 1 below).
3. From the ACP Panel Type drop-down (2), select the ACP 106 model to be configured.
The Configure ACPs dialog box populates with a graphic of the selected ACP 106.
4. From the ID # drop-down (3), select the ID number that corresponds with the bus ID
set on the ACP 106 DIP switch assembly (see the ACP 106 D Setup Guide or the
ACP 106 EU/MK Setup Guide for information on setting the bus ID #).
Figure 169. Selecting ACP 106 for Configuration
5. In the panel graphic on the left side of the Configure ACPs dialog box, the mute button
labeled OFF is highlighted (yellow). When a button is highlighted, it is selected for
configuration.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Audio Control Panels
107
6. From the Control Type drop-down (see figure 170, 4 below), select either:
•
Fixed for the OFF button to unmute all output.
Follow Selector for the OFF button to unmute a group defined by a selector
•
button.
If Fixed was chosen:
a. From the Mute Master drop-down (5), select the mute group containing all output
channels.
If Follow Selector was chosen, the button is fully configured.
7. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the mute button labeled
ON (6).
8. From the Control Type drop-down (7), select either:
•
Fixed for the ON button to mute all output.
•
Follow Selector for the ON button to mute a group defined by a selector button.
NOTE: The same control type chosen for the OFF mute button should be chosen for
the ON mute button.
If Fixed was chosen:
a. From the Mute Master drop-down (8), select the mute group containing all output
channels.
If Follow Selector was chosen, the button is fully configured.
Figure 170. Configuring Mute Off and Mute On Buttons
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Audio Control Panels
108
9. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the volume button
labeled DOWN (see figure 171, 9 below).
10. From the Control Type drop-down, choose Follow Selector (¢).
11. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the volume button
labeled UP (£).
12. From the Control Type drop-down, choose Follow Selector (¢).
Figure 171. Configuring Volume Down and Volume Up
13. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled MIC
(see figure 172, ¤ on the next page).
14. From the Control Type drop-down (¥), choose Selector-Vol/Mute.
a. From the Volume Master drop-down (¦), select the gain group containing all
microphone source channels. This group must be created from the Configure
Groups dialog box before it can be selected from the drop-down (see Managing
Devices in Device Manager on page 86).
b. From the Mute Master drop-down (§), select the mute group containing all
microphone source channels.
15. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled
PROGRAM (see figure 172, ¨ below).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Audio Control Panels
109
16. From the Control Type drop-down (©), choose Selector-Vol/Mute.
a. From the Volume Master drop-down (ª), select the gain group containing all
program source channels.
b. From the Mute Master drop-down («), select the gain group containing all program
source channels.
Figure 172. Configuring Mic and Program Selector Buttons
The ACP 106 panel is now fully configured. From this point, either:
•
Add additional ACP panel configurations.
•
Save the ACP panel configuration to the DSP Configurator configuration file (see Saving
and Pushing ACP Configurations below).
•
Push the configurations to the DMP 128 FlexPlus (see Saving and Pushing ACP
Configurations below).
Saving and Pushing ACP Configurations
1. Configure up to eight ACP panels.
2. Close the Configure ACPs dialog box. Button configurations remain after the dialog box
is closed.
3. Save the configuration file. ACP configurations are saved with the configuration file.
4. Connect Live to a DMP 128 FlexPlus via a LAN (TCP/IP) connection.
NOTE: The host computer must be connected to the DMP 128 FlexPlus LAN port
in order to push ACP configurations to the device.
5. Select Tools > Configure ACP Panels. The Configure ACPs dialog box opens.
6. Click Push Configuration to Device. Configurations from all eight tabs in the
Configure ACPs dialog box are pushed to the DMP 128 FlexPlus.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Audio Control Panels
110
Dante Controller
This section describes the DMP 128 FlexPlus network installation, configuration, and control
using Dante Controller for Windows and covers the following topics:
•
Overview
•
Downloading and Installing Dante Controller
•
Configuring the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Dante Controller
•
Physical Dante Network Setup
•
Dante Controller Operation
•
Dante Routing Operation
•
Dante Troubleshooting
Overview
DMP 128 FlexPlus devices (DMP 128 FlexPlus C AT and C V AT) use Dante technology
by Audinate to provide high performance digital audio networking over standard TCP/IP
networks. The Dante Controller software application is used to route audio on the network.
Dante allows audio channels to be transported across a switched Ethernet data network
while meeting the quality requirements of professional audio.
Up to 24 channels can be transmitted from the DMP 128 FlexPlus to the Dante network and
up to 48 channels can be received by the DMP 128 FlexPlus from the Dante network. AT
inputs 33 through 48 can be used to facilitate EXP bus communication (see Connecting a
DMP 128 FlexPlus Device and an EXP-enabled non-AT Device on page 99).
Audio signals are converted by DMP 128 FlexPlus devices, processed and routed to the
AT bus, and transmitted onto the Dante network. Audinate recommends the Dante audio
network be kept separate from other networks. However, the audio network can be shared
with control traffic or unrelated data traffic. Audio channels can be unicast or multicast to
make the best use of available bandwidth.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
111
Downloading and Installing Dante Controller
Dante Controller from Audinate is required to route transmitters and receivers and can be
used to configure Dante settings and monitor performance. Install Dante Controller on a PC
running Microsoft® Windows® 7 or newer. For full details about computer requirements and
to download the software, see the Dante Controller product page at www.extron.com.
To download Dante Controller:
1. From www.extron.com, hover over the Download tab at the top of the page.
2. From the Featured Software list, select Dante Controller.
3. From the Dante Controller product page, click the blue Download button.
4. Select Run to run the Dante Controller installer. Select Save to save the install file to run
at a later time.
5. If you choose to run the file, follow all prompts. If you saved the file, click the saved file
to begin installation when ready.
The installed Dante Controller program files are saved in:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Audinate\Dante Controller\DanteController.exe.
Configuring the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Dante Controller
Use a standard Ethernet cable to connect the DMP 128 FlexPlus to a Dante network via the
rear panel AT port (see Rear Panel Features and Cabling, C on page 5) and power the
device.
Device Name
Multiple devices on the same Dante network can present difficulty in identifying individual
devices. To avoid confusion and difficulty, ensure the following steps are taken:
•
Connect devices to the Dante network one at a time.
•
Rename each device before making audio connections in Dante Controller.
•
Rename each device with a unique and meaningful identifier.
•
Rename each device before the next device is connected to the Dante network.
ATTENTION: It is essential that a Dante device be named before audio subscriptions
with other devices are established. Existing subscriptions are removed when a
device is renamed.
In Dante Controller, a device can be renamed to identify the device on the audio network.
The default device name of the DMP 128 FlexPlus consists of the model name, followed by
the last six characters of the Dante interface MAC address (for example, DMP128F-0ee8ee).
In addition to renaming the device, individual Transmitter (Tx) and Receiver (Rx) channels
can be renamed.
The Dante device name must be set before making any connections to other devices on the
Dante network. Renaming a device after making connections removes existing connections
to and from that device. Refer to Renaming the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Dante Controller
on the next page for renaming procedure.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
112
Receiver and Transmitter Names
In addition to renaming a device, individual transmitter and receiver channels can be
renamed in Dante Controller. Rename transmitter and receiver channels to reflect the
location of the device or the purpose of the transmitter or receiver. Ensure transmitter and
receiver channels are renamed before making audio connections between devices. Refer to
Renaming a Receiver or Transmitter on page 115 for renaming procedure.
Dante Controller Naming Conventions
•
Device names follow Domain Name System (DNS) hostname rules. Legal characters are
A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and hyphen (-). Names must begin with a letter and cannot end with a
hyphen (-).
•
Dante Tx and Rx channel names (also known as labels) can be up to 31 characters in
length. Label names are not case-sensitive. For example, “ANALOG OUT-1” and “analog
out-1” are recognized as the same name. Unicode and non-roman characters are not
supported.
•
Tx and Rx channel labels can use any character except equals (=), period (.), or @.
•
Tx and Rx channel labels must be unique on a device but do not need to be unique on
the network.
Renaming the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Dante Controller
NOTE: Dante device naming can also be done via DSP Configurator (see Dante Device
on page 97).
1. Ensure that the control computer and a single DMP 128 FlexPlus are connected to the
same network.
2. From the control computer Start menu select:
All Programs > Audinate > Dante Controller > Dante Controller
3. The Dante Controller - Network View screen opens. All Dante devices on the
network are discovered and listed.
4. From the Device menu, select Device View or press <Ctrl+D> on the keyboard (see
figure 173 below).
Figure 173. Opening Device View
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
113
5. The Dante Controller - Device View dialog opens. Select the device being
configured from the (Select a Dante Device...) drop‑down menu (see figure 174, 1
below).
Figure 174. Device View and Select a Dante Device Drop-Down
NOTES:
• If there are multiple DMP 128 FlexPlus devices connected to the network that
have not been renamed, obtain the Dante interface media access code (MAC)
address of the desired device from the white label on the rear panel of the
device in order to identify it in Dante Controller.
• There are multiple MAC addresses listed on the rear panel of a DMP 128
FlexPlus, one for the LAN port and one for the Dante interface. The Dante
interface MAC address is listed beneath the LAN port MAC address.
The Device View dialog populates with the selected DMP 128 FlexPlus information.
Figure 175. Populated Device View Dialog Box
6. Click the Device Config tab (see figure 176, 1 below) to open the Device Config
page.
7. In the Rename Device panel, enter the new name of the device in the text field. No
spaces are allowed in the name. Names should be significant identifiers. For example,
enter DMP128FlexPlus-MainRack (2).
8. Click Apply (3). A confirmation prompt opens.
Figure 176. Device Config Dialog, Rename Device
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
114
9. Click Yes (4) to confirm the new name, then close the Device Configuration dialog
box. The new name is written to the Dante interface of the DMP 128 FlexPlus. Repeat
as necessary for all devices.
NOTE: The device name assigned in Dante Controller only applies to the Dante
interface and does not affect the device name recognized in DSP Configurator.
Figure 177. Rename Device Confirmation Dialog Box
Renaming a Receiver or Transmitter
In addition to renaming devices, individual receiver and transmitter channels can be
renamed in Dante Controller. To better organize the various receivers and transmitters,
it is recommended each receiver and each transmitter be named using a description of
the device they belong to, the location of the device, or the purpose of the receiver or
transmitter.
To view the receiver or transmitter channels in Dante Controller, click the + sign next to the
receiver or transmitter device name to expand it. The + sign becomes a – sign when the
device is expanded (see figure 178, 1).
Figure 178. Expanded Device View — Input and Output Names
TIP: To simplify setup and operation of large matrix systems, rename the receiver and
transmitter channels to better indicate the source at the transmitters or
receivers.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
115
Renaming a Receiver
The default names shown in the Dante Receivers column are extracted from the Dante
interface of the connected device (see figure 179, 1). The DMP 128 FlexPlus receivers are
labelled EXP_In-01 through EXP_In-48 because the DMP 128 FlexPlus can receive signal at
the 48 EXP inputs. Follow the instructions on the next page to rename a receiver.
To rename a DMP 128 FlexPlus receiver:
1. From the Device menu on the Network View screen, select Device View, or press
<Ctrl+D> on the keyboard. The Device View dialog box opens.
2. From the (Select a Dante Device..) drop-down menu, select the name of the desired
DMP 128 FlexPlus (see figure 179, 1 below).
3. On the Device View screen, select the Receive tab (2).
4. Click on the name of the receiver to be renamed. The name becomes a text box with a
cursor (3).
5. Enter the new name (up to 31 characters) using any combination of letters, numbers,
and special characters except for @, =, and . (period).
6. Press <Enter> on the keyboard to confirm the name, or click another channel text box.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to rename additional receiver channels.
8. When finished renaming receivers, close the Device View dialog box.
Figure 179. Device View Screen — Renaming a Receiver
Renaming a Transmitter
The default names shown in the Dante Transmitters column are extracted from the Dante
interface of the connected device (see figure 178, 2 on the previous page). The first set
of DMP 128 FlexPlus transmitters is labelled Output-01 through Output-08 because the
DMP 128 FlexPlus can transmit signal routed to the analog outputs to the Dante network.
The second set of DMP 128 FlexPlus transmitters is labelled EXP-Out-01 through
Exp_Out‑16 because the DMP 128 FlexPlus can transmit signal routed to the EXP outputs
to the Dante network. Follow the instructions on the next page to rename a transmitter.
To rename a DMP 128 FlexPlus transmitter:
1. Select Device View from the Device menu on the Network View screen or press
<Ctrl+D> on the keyboard. The Device View dialog box opens.
2. From the (Select a Dante Device...) drop-down menu, select the name of the DMP
128 FlexPlus (see figure 180, 1 on the next page).
3. On the Device View screen, select the Transmit tab (2).
4. Click in the Channel Label column to the right of the name of the transmitter being
renamed. A text box and cursor appear (3).
5. Enter a new name (up to 31 characters) using any combination of letters, numbers, and
special characters except for @, =, and . (period).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
116
6. Press <Enter> on the keyboard to confirm the name, or click another label text box.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to rename additional transmitter channels.
8. When finished renaming transmitters, close the Device View dialog box.
Figure 180. Device View Screen — Renaming a Transmitter
Finding a Dante Device IP Address
To find the IP address of a Dante device, the name of the device is needed (see Renaming
the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Dante Controller on page 113).
NOTE: If the DMP 128 FlexPlus has not been renamed, its default name consists of the
product name followed by a hyphen, plus the last 6 digits of the device MAC address
(for example, DMP128F-0ee8ee).
1. Open Dante Controller.
2. On the Dante Controller-Network View screen, click the Device Info tab (see figure
181, 1 below).
3. On the Device Info page, locate the name of the DMP 128 FlexPlus in the Device Name
column (2). The IP address is located in the Primary Address column (3). In the
example below, the IP address for the connected DMP 128 FlexPlus is 192.168.11.120.
Figure 181. Device Info Page
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
117
Physical Dante Network Setup
A physical network is required to share Dante audio channels between Dante-enabled
devices like the DMP 128 FlexPlus. Other Dante-enabled devices must be on the same
physical network in order to communicate via Dante. A daisy chain topology can be used to
connect multiple devices.
Daisy Chain topology has DMP 128 FlexPlus units connected in succession.
1
2
2 (SEC)
+V +S -S G
RS-232
Tx Rx G
POWER
12V
2.0 A MAX
1
2
1 6
3 8
2 7
4
1
3
2
4
5
7
6
8
IN G O IN G O
USB AUD
R
C V A1 T(PRI)
1
2
I/O
5
ACP
4
I/O
R
C V A1T(PRI)
3
2
OUTS
1
2
INPUTS
1
IN G O IN G O
2 (SEC)
+V +S -S G
RS-232
Tx Rx G
LAN/VoIP
Tx Rx G
4
AT
RS-232
38
REMOTE
+V +S -S G
2 7
USB AUD
DMP EXP
2 (SEC)
16
ACP
R
C V A 1T (PRI)
5
OUTS
4
POWER
12V
2.0 A MAX
LAN/VoIP
2
3
2
AT
1
2
INPUTS
1
IN G O IN G O
REMOTE
1
4
DMP EXP
Tx Rx G
38
USB AUD
LAN/VoIP
RS-232
27
16
REMOTE
+V +S -S G
LAN/VoIP
2 (SEC)
REMOTE
1 (PRI)
5
I/O
4
POWER
12V
2.0 A MAX
ACP
3
2
OUTS
1
2
AT
1
IN G O IN G O
INPUTS
4
DMP EXP
3
I/O
2
ACP
1
AT
POWER
12V
2.0 A MAX
DMP EXP
INPUTS
Ethernet
USB AUD
R
1
2
CVAT
Figure 182. Daisy Chain Network Topology
NOTE: The daisy chain topology only functions in switched mode. It is not possible to
use in redundant mode.
2 (SEC)
Primary Port
Secondary Port
+V +S -S G
RS-232
Tx Rx G
LAN/VoIP
1 (PRI)
REMOTE
ACP
2
5
6
I/O
1
In redundant mode, the 2-port AT switch becomes separate primary and secondary ports
that duplicate
audio traffic. Port 1 is marked
(PRI)
for primary
while
port 23 is marked
1
2
4
3
4
1
2
(SEC) for secondary (see figure 183 below). Primary and secondary switches/ports cannot
be connected together anywhere in the audio network. Redundant configuration can be
IN Configurator.
G O IN G O
enabled using Dante Controller or DSP
AT
POWER
12V
2.0 A MAX
DMP EXP
INPUTS
Redundant Configuration
USB
1
2
Figure 183. Primary and Secondary AT Ports
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
118
To configure the DMP 128 FlexPlus in redundant mode using Dante Controller:
1. Open Dante Controller.
2. Press <Ctrl+D> on the keyboard to access the Device View dialog box.
3. Select the desired DMP 128 FlexPlus from the (Choose a Dante Device...)
drop‑down menu (see figure 184, 1 below).
4. Select the Network Config tab (2).
5. From the Dante Redundancy panel, use the drop-down to select Redundant (3).
Figure 184. Redundant Mode Configuration in Dante Controller
To configure the DMP 128 FlexPlus in redundant mode using DSP Configurator:
1. Use DSP Configurator to connect to the DMP 128 FlexPlus in Live mode (see Live and
Emulate Panel on page 17).
2. Select Tools > Device Settings.
3. In the Device Settings dialog box, use the right navigation arrow (
and select the Dante Device tab (see figure 185, 1 below).
) to navigate to
4. Select Enable Redundant Mode (2).
5. Select DHCP or Static IP and enter a valid redundancy network configuration (3).
6. Click Apply (4).
Figure 185. Redundant Mode Configuration in DSP Configurator
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
119
Dante Controller Operation
Dante Transmitters and Receivers
A Dante network is comprised of transmitters that output digital audio onto the Dante
network and receivers that receive digital audio input from the Dante network.
•
Transmitters output digital audio from the device onto the audio network.
•
Receivers take in digital audio from the audio network into the device.
DMP 128 FlexPlus Transmitters and Receivers
In the DMP 128 FlexPlus, the line output and EXP output channels are Dante transmitters
because their audio output is transmitted onto the Dante network. Routing an analog
output to the Dante network allows the signal to be output on both analog and Dante
simultaneously, the same is true for the EXP outputs.
The DMP 128 FlexPlus EXP input channels are Dante receivers because they receive digital
audio signal from the Dante network that can then be routed and mixed into the
DMP 128 FlexPlus mix matrix.
Dante Routing Operation
Dante Controller is used for all network signal routing of transmitters and receivers for
Dante-enabled devices. The DMP 128 FlexPlus transmitters and receivers are available
in Dante Controller for routing to other Dante devices (see Dante Transmitters and
Receivers above).
Routing Devices
After the DMP 128 FlexPlus is configured, the channels can be routed to the other Dante
devices on the audio network. Channels transmitted to the network or received from the
network are routed using the Dante Controller Routing tab on the Network View page (see
figure 186 on the next page). The transmitters, listed horizontally along the top of the screen,
and the receivers, listed vertically down the left side, form a matrix whose intersections are
the connection points between the receivers and transmitters.
•
To make a receiver-to-transmitter connection, click once on an intersection.
•
To remove a connection, click on the icon at the intersection.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
120
One of the following icons appears at each connection intersection, indicating the status of
both the transmitter and receiver channels and the connections (subscriptions):
Icon
Description
Indicates an active subscription.
Indicates subscription is in progress.
Indicates a pending subscription.
Indicates a broken subscription.
Indicates the transmitting device has been removed from the network or is
switched off.
See the Dante Controller User Guide, available at www.audinate.com, for additional
information.
Creating Subscriptions Between Transmitters and Receivers
1. Ensure the control computer and DMP 128 FlexPlus are connected to the same
network.
2. From the start menu select:
All Programs > Audinate > Dante Controller > Dante Controller
The Dante Controller - Network View screen opens.
Dante Controller auto-discovers Dante devices on the network and advertises itself to
allow other Dante-enabled devices to communicate with it. Transmitters connect to
receivers using the subscription matrix.
Figure 186. Routing Tab of Network View Screen
3. To show the transmitters of a Dante device, click the + box next to the desired device in
the Dante Transmitters panel, such as AXI22D-ConfRm1 (see figure 186, 1 above). The
+ changes to a – sign when the device expands.
4. To show the receivers of a Dante device, click the + box next to the desired device in
the Dante Receivers panel, such as DMP128FlexPlus-MainRack (2).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
121
5. Click the intersection of the desired subscription between a transmitter and a
receiver (3).
Example: The mic/line input transmitters of the AXI22D-ConfRm1 and
AXI22D-ConfRm2 are routed to the EXP input receivers of the DMP128FlexPlus-MainRack.
A check mark at the intersection indicates the subscription is made. A check mark also
appears next to the receiver channel.
NOTE: A receiver can connect to only one transmitter. A transmitter can connect to
multiple receivers.
Sending SIS Commands to Dante Audio Interface Devices through the DMP
The DMP 128 FlexPlus can be set to pass through SIS commands to connected Dantecontrolled Extron devices (see Dante Control and Configuration on page 144 for the list
of SIS commands).
To send an SIS command to an AXI device connected to a DMP 128 FlexPlus:
1. Connect the DMP and Dante-controlled devices to the same network via their AT ports
(see Physical Dante Network Setup on page 118).
2. Connect to the DMP via the DataViewer or HyperTerminal utility (see Remote
Communication and Control on page 126).
3. Use the Set verbose mode command to set the DMP to Verbose mode 3 (see
Set verbose mode on page 135).
Example:
Command
Response
w3cv|
Vrb3
4. Use the Query available remote devices command (see Query available remote
devices on page 144) to receive a list of Dante devices that are currently connected to
the DMP.
Example:
Command
Response
waexpr|
ExprA•AXI-XTP-RoomA]
AXI-XTP-RoomB]
NOTE: This list is similar to the list displayed within Dante Controller.
5. Use the Enable remote connection command to display the remote Dante-controlled
device responses based on the list of devices provided in the response in step 4 (see
Enable remote connection for listening on page 144). Repeat if necessary for all
desired devices.
Example:
Command
Response
wcAXI02-XTP-RoomA*1expr|
ExprCAXI-XTP-RoomA*1
NOTE: AXI devices can be set up for listening even if not currently connected to the
DMP unit.
6. To verify that the DMP is listening to the correct remote devices, use the Query remote
devices being listened to command to display a list of all remote devices enable with the
command in step 5 (see Query remote devices being listened to on page 144).
Example:
Command
Response
wlexpr|
ExprL•AXI-XTP-RoomA]
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
122
7. Send the desired command to the AXI and confirm the correct response is received.
•
When entering a command, use the “w” character in place of the <Esc> key
and the “pipe” character ( | ) in place of a return. Failing to do so may cause the
command to fail.
•
The closing bracket ( } ) is necessary to successfully end a command before
attempting to send a new command.
Example:
Command
Response
{dante@AXI02-XTP-RoomA:wg40000*10AU}|
{dante@AXI-XTP-RoomA}
DsG40000*10]
NOTE: The DMP provides the tag showing the Dante-controlled remote device
name while the remote device provides the response for the SIS command.
Disconnecting Inputs from Outputs
To undo routing, click the junction again to disconnect the receiver from the transmitter.
NOTE: After making changes to Dante network routing such as subscriptions, device
names, or channel labels, wait at least 5 seconds before disconnecting or powering
down the devices. This ensures that the new information is properly saved to those
devices. Device level configuration such as sample rates, latency, and clock settings
are saved instantly.
Dante Troubleshooting
The most common Dante troubleshooting issues occur when devices are not discovered by
Dante Controller or when routing is not successful. Both issues occur when software is not
able to properly discover devices operating on the Dante network.
Before moving into more difficult troubleshooting, shut down Dante Controller and reseat the
Ethernet cable connecting the PC to the Dante network and restart Dante Controller. This
can be enough for the software to reacquire the Dante network.
If the problem persists, perform the following troubleshooting procedures in the order listed.
Simplifying the Network for Troubleshooting
If further troubleshooting of Dante Controller is necessary, begin by simplifying the network:
1. Bypass network switches by connecting two Dante-compatible units, such as a
DMP 128 FlexPlus and an AXI 44 AT, via their AT ports.
2. Connect the PC to an unused AT port with an Ethernet cable.
3. Use Dante Controller to check if the issue was resolved before moving on to network
interface troubleshooting.
4. If the issue is resolved, add connections and hardware one at a time, checking for
proper operation after each addition, until the point of failure is discovered (typically a
bad cable or invalid redundant configuration).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
123
Troubleshooting the Network Interface
If the issue is still present, continue to diagnose the PC network connections as described
below. Check Dante Controller after each step to see if the problem is resolved.
1. Click the Choose a Dante Interface icon (see figure 187, 1 below). The Configure
Dante Interfaces dialog box opens.
Figure 187. Choose a Dante Interface Icon
Be certain the correct LAN connection is selected (the PC LAN port that is physically
connected to the AT network) and note the IP address.
Figure 188. Configure Dante Interfaces Dialog Box
2. If it is on, turn off the PC wireless adapter. Disable all connections except the LAN
port connected to the Dante network (verify this is the correct port by checking the IP
address shown in the Configure Dante Interfaces dialog).
3. Turn off all anti-virus and firewall software on the computer.
4. Enable DHCP on the remaining network connection. This forces the computer to
acquire an IP address from the Dante interface.
NOTE: A DHCP server must be on the network for DHCP to function correctly.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
124
Restarting Dante Controller
If subscriptions or normal operation cannot be restored, restart Dante Controller software.
To access the Dante Controller Help file, do any of the following:
•
Click the Help icon in the upper-right corner of the Network View screen (see
figure 189, 1 below).
•
Select Help, then Online Help or Offline Help from the menu (2).
•
Press the <F1> key on the computer keyboard for online help or <Shift+F1> for offline
help.
Figure 189. Accessing the Dante Help File
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Dante Controller
125
Remote
Communication and
Control
This section describes how to control the DMP 128 FlexPlus with SIS programming and
covers the following topics:
•
Connection Options
•
Host-to-Device Communications
•
SIS Overview
•
Command and Response Table for Basic SIS Commands
•
Command and Response Table for DSP SIS Commands
•
Command and Response Table for VoIP SIS Commands
•
Object ID (OID) Number Tables
Connection Options
The DMP 128 FlexPlus Digital Matrix Processor can be remotely connected via a host
computer or other device (such as a control system) attached to the rear panel RS-232 port
or LAN port, or the front panel USB Config port.
The DMP 128 FlexPlus can be set up and controlled using SIS commands or DSP
Configurator software (see Installation on page 4 for pin assignments and details on
the configuration and control port connections. For information on DSP Configurator, see
DSP Configurator Software on page 10).
SIS commands can be executed using the Extron DataViewer application available from
www.extron.com. The host computer issuing the commands can be connected via the
following connections:
•
RS-232 Port on the next page
•
LAN Port on the next page
•
USB Config Port on page 128
DMP 128 • Remote Control and Configuration
126
RS-232 Port
The DMP 128 FlexPlus has a serial port that can be connected to a host device such as
a computer running either the DataViewer or HyperTerminal utilities. The port makes serial
control of the DMP 128 FlexPlus possible.
The DMP 128 FlexPlus uses the following RS-232 protocols:
• 38400 baud
• No parity
• 1 stop bit
• 8 data bits
• No flow control
NOTES:
• The rear panel configuration port requires 38400 baud communication. This
speed is higher than most other Extron products. The DMP 128 FlexPlus control
software automatically sets the connection for the appropriate speed. When using
DataViewer or similar application, make sure the host PC or control system is set
for 38400 baud.
• See Rear Panel Features and Cabling on page 4 for additional details on
connecting to the RS-232 port.
LAN Port
The DMP 128 FlexPlus can be connected to an Ethernet LAN or WAN. Communication
between the device and the controlling device is via Telnet (a TCP socket using port 23). The
Telnet port can be changed, if necessary, via SIS. This connection makes SIS control of the
device possible using a computer connected to the same LAN or WAN. The SIS commands
and behavior are identical to the commands and behavior the product exhibits when
communicating by serial port or USB.
The DMP 128 FlexPlus LAN (LAN 1 on V-model) port defaults are as follows:
IP Address
192.168.254.254
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
DHCP
OFF
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover cable and
must be properly terminated for your application.
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the DMP 128
FlexPlus.
•
Straight-through (Patch) cable — Connection of the DMP 128 FlexPlus to an
Ethernet LAN.
Pins:
12345678
Crossover Cable
(for direct connection to a PC)
End 1
Pin
Insert Twisted
Pair Wires
RJ-45
Connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
End 2
Wire Color
white-orange
orange
white-green
blue
white-blue
green
white-brown
brown
T568A
Straight-through Cable
(for connection to a switch, hub, or router)
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wire Color
white-green
green
white-orange
blue
white-blue
orange
white-brown
brown
T568B
A cable that is wired as TIA/EIA T568A at one
end and T568B at the other (Tx and Rx pairs
reversed) is a "crossover" cable.
End 1
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wire Color
End 2
Pin
white-orange
orange
white-green
blue
white-blue
green
white-brown
brown
T568B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wire Color
white-orange
orange
white-green
blue
white-blue
green
white-brown
brown
T568B
A cable wired the same at both ends is called
a "straight-through" cable because no pin/pair
assignments are swapped.
Figure 190. RJ-45 Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
127
Establishing a Network Connection via LAN
1. Open a TCP socket to port 23 using the DMP 128 FlexPlus IP address.
NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the factory
specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.
2. The DMP 128 FlexPlus responds with a copyright message including the date, the
name of the product, firmware version, part number, and the current date/time.
3. If the device is password protected, enter the appropriate administrator or user
password.
a. If the password is accepted, the device responds with Login User or Login
Administrator.
b. If the password is not accepted, the Password prompt reappears.
NOTES:
• The factory configured password for this device has been set to the device serial
number. Passwords are case sensitive.
• The Ethernet link times out after a designated period of time of no communications.
By default, the timeout value is set to 5 minutes and can be changed (see Set
global IP port timeout on page 132).
• Extron recommends leaving the default timeout at 5 minutes and periodically issuing
the Query (Q) command to keep the connection active. If there are long idle periods,
disconnect the socket and reopen the connection when another command must be
sent.
USB Config Port
The DMP 128 FlexPlus has a front panel USB port that can be connected to a computer
as a host device running either the HyperTerminal or DataViewer utilities for control of the
device. Once a connection is established, SIS programming can begin (see Host-toDevice Communications on the next page).
Verbose Modes
Telnet connections are used to monitor changes that occur, such as commands from other
Telnet sockets or a serial port. For a Telnet session to receive change notices, the Telnet
session must be in verbose mode 1 or 3 (Set verbose mode on page 135). In verbose
mode 1 or 3, the Telnet socket reports changes in messages that resemble SIS command
responses.
Tagged and Untagged Responses
When a query command is sent in verbose mode 0 or 1, only the “untagged” value is
returned. When a query command is sent in other verbose modes, the response is “tagged”
and resembles the response to a set command.
Example: The gain query command EG40000AU} is sent. The following responses
appear depending on the verbose mode:
•
Untagged (verbose 0 or 1): 626], just the gain value with no other information.
•
Tagged (verbose 2 or 3): DsG40000*626], the type of query sent, the OID queried,
and the gain value.
NOTE: All query responses listed in this guide are shown untagged.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
128
Host-to-Device Communications
SIS commands consist of one or more characters per field. No special characters are
required to begin or end a command sequence. When the scaler determines that a
command is valid, it executes the command and sends a response to the host device. All
responses from the scaler to the host end with a carriage return and a line feed
(CR/LF = ]), indicating the end of the response character string (one or more characters).
DMP 128 FlexPlus-initiated Messages
The DMP 128 FlexPlus initiates messages under specific conditions. No response is
required from the host. The DMP 128 FlexPlus-initiated messages are listed below.
Copyright Message
The DMP 128 FlexPlus initiates the following copyright message when it is first powered on
or when a connection via IP is established:
(c) Copyright 2019, Extron Electronics, DMP 128 FlexPlus {model}, Vn.nn,
60-nnnn-nn]
Day, DD MMM YYYY HH:MM:SS]
•
Vn.nn is the firmware version number.
•
{model} is the full model name. DMP 128 FlexPlus C V AT, for example.
•
60-nnnn-nn is the DMP 128 FlexPlus part number.
The DMP 128 FlexPlus sends the boot and copyright messages under the following
circumstances:
•
If the DMP 128 FlexPlus is off and RS-232 connection is already set up (the PC
is cabled to the DMP 128 FlexPlus and a serial communication program such as
DataViewer is open), the connected unit sends these messages via RS-232 when first
powered on.
•
The DMP 128 FlexPlus sends the boot and copyright messages when a Telnet
connection to the DMP 128 FlexPlus is opened via Telnet, but not via RS-232. If using
a Telnet connection, the copyright message, date, and time may be followed by a
password prompt.
Password Prompt
The ]Password prompt requires an administrator or user password followed by a carriage
return. The prompt is repeated if the incorrect password is entered.
If the correct password is entered, the unit responds with ]Login Administrator] or
]Login User] depending on the password entered. If passwords are the same for both
administrator and user, the unit will default to administrator privileges.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
129
SIS Overview
Using the Command and Response Tables
When programming, certain characters are more conveniently represented by their
hexadecimal rather than ASCII values. The table below shows the hexadecimal equivalent of
each ASCII character:
ASCII to HEX Conversion Table
Space
•
I
l
Figure 191. ASCII to Hex Conversion Table
The Command and Response tables list valid ASCII commands, the DMP 128 FlexPlus
responses to the host, and descriptions of the command functions with the results of
executing the commands.
Symbol Definitions
]
}
•
|
=
Carriage return (with line feed)
=
Carriage return (no line feed)
=
Space character
=
Pipe (can be used interchangeably with the }
character)
E
=
Escape key
W
=
Can be used interchangeably with the E
character.
NOTES:
• Only instances marked with a • character require a space. Any spaces between
characters in the command and response tables are only inserted for ease of
reading.
• Unless stated otherwise, SIS commands are not case sensitive.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
130
Error Responses
When the DMP 128 FlexPlus is unable to execute the command, it returns an error
response to the host. The error response codes and their descriptions are as follows:
E10 —
Unrecognized command
E24 —
Privilege violation
E12 —
Invalid port number
E25 —
Device not present
E13 —
Invalid parameter
E26 —
Maximum number of connections
exceeded
E14 —
Not valid for this configuration
E27 —
Invalid event number
E17 —
Invalid command for signal type
E28 —
Bad filename or file not found
E18 —
System/command timed out
E31—
Attempt to break port passthrough when not set
E22 —
Busy
Simple Control Port Commands
Upper and lower case text can be used interchangeably except where noted. Port 23 is the
default port for Telnet. Port 80 is the default port for web browsers. Both can be mapped to
different ports.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
131
Command and Response Table Sections
Command and Response Table for Basic SIS Commands
Command
ASCII command
Response
Additional description
(host to device)
(device to host)
General information
I
VnnXnn• A04x08•
E48x24]
Example:
V00X00 A04X08 E48x24
Model name
1I
DMP 128 FlexPlus]
Response varies
depending on model.
Model description
2I
Digital audio matrix
processor]
Response will vary
depending on model.
System memory usage
3I
<number> Bytes Used
out of <number>
KBytes]
User memory usage
4I
<number> Bytes Used
out of <number>
KBytes]
Query firmware version
Q
{version x.xx}]
Query firmware version
with build
*Q
{version x.xx.xxxx)]
Query kernel/library
version
**Q
{version x.xx.xxxxLX)]
Query firmware version
(advanced)
X4% Q
{specific version info}]
Query part number
N
zz-zzzz-zz]
Set current connected
port timeout
E 0* X2^ TC}
Pti0*X2^]
View current connected
port timeout
E 0TC}
X2^]
Set global IP port
timeout
E1* X2^ TC}
Pti1*X2^]
View global IP port
timeout
E 1TC}
X2^]
Information requests
See X4% below.
Ethernet Data Port
KEY:
X2^ =
IP Timeout
The number of seconds before timeout on IP connections (min=1,
max= 65000 and default = 30 (300 seconds)
X4% =
Firmware Query
0
1
2
3
4
= Detailed version information (includes all 2Q, 3Q, and 4Q)
= Firmware version
= Final stage bootloader
= Factory base code version
= Updated firmware version
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
132
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Additional description
Serial Data Port
Configure parameters
E X! * X1@ , X1# , X1$, X2* Cpn X!• Ccp X1@ , X1# ,
X1$, X2*]
E X! CP}
X1@ , X1# , X1$, X2*]
E X! CY}
X1^]
E X! * X1& , X1* CF}
Cpn X!• Cfl X1& , X1*]
E X! CF}
X1& , X1*]
CP}
View parameters
View mode
Configure flow control
View flow control
KEY:
X! =
X1@ =
X1#
X1$
X1^
X1&
X1*
Port Number
01 (always 01 for DMP 128 FlexPlus)
Baud Rate
300, 600,1200, 1800, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600 (default), 14400,
19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200.
=
Parity
Odd, Even, None (default), Mark, Space. Only use the first letter.
=
Data Bits
7, 8 (default)
=
Port Type
0 = RS-232 (default)
=
Flow Control
Hardware, Software, None (default). Only use the first letter.
=
Data Pacing
Specified in milliseconds between bytes. 0000-1000ms (default is 0
ms). For host port or ports, this value is ignored and always returns
a 0.
Stop Bits
1 (default) or 2.
X2* =
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
133
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
E X# CN}
E•CN}
Ipn•X#]
E CN}
E X$ CT}
E CT}
E *CT}
E CZ}
E 1DH}
E 0DH}
E DH}
X#]
Ipt•X$]
X$]
X2%]
X@]
Idh1]
Idh0]
X12)]
Additional description
IP Setup Commands
Set unit name
Set unit name to factory
default
View unit name
Set date/time
View date/time
View date/time in hex
View GMT offset
Set DHCP on
Set DHCP off
View DHCP mode
Ipn•X2!]
NOTE: The following commands affect the LAN port on a C AT model and the LAN 1 port on the C V AT.
Set IP address
View IP address
View hardware address
(MAC)
EX% CI}
E CI}
E CH}
Ipi•X%]
X%]
X^]
In verbose modes 2 and 3:
Iph X^]
Set subnet mask
Ips•X&]
View subnet mask
X&]
Ipg•X%]
X%]
EX& CS}
E CS}
Set gateway IP address EX% CG}
View gateway IP
E CG}
address
KEY:
X@ =
GMT Offset Value
This represents hours and minutes (hh:mm) offset from Greenwich
Mean Time.
X# =
Unit Name
A text string up to 63 characters drawn from the alphabet (A-Z),
digits (0-9), and minus sign/hyphen (-).
X$ =
Local Date and Time
Format
MM/DD/YY-HH:MM:SS
X% =
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx . Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are optional
in setting values and are suppressed in responses.
X^ =
X& =
Hardware MAC Address
00-05-A6-xx-xx-xx
Subnet Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx . Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are optional
in setting values and are suppressed in responses.
Default Name
Combination of unit model name and last 3 pairs of MAC address.
Date and Time in Hex
Date and time returned in 7 hex bytes (month, day, year, hour, minutes, seconds, and day of the week with Sunday = 1).
Prefix (subnet mask bits)
Subnet 255.255.0.0 is represented as a Prefix value of /16.
DHCP Status
0 = off (default), 1 = on
X2! =
X2% =
X4& =
X12) =
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
134
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Additional description
IP Setup Commands (continued)
Set IP
EX4^ * X% CISG}
Set IP/subnet
Cisg •X4^ * X% / X4& *
EX4^ * X% / X4& CISG}
Set IP/subnet/gateway
(all)
EX4^ * X% / X4& * X%
CISG}
View IP/subnet/gateway EX4^ CISG}
(all)
X%]
Cisg•X4^ * X% / X4& *
X%]
Cisg•X4^ * X% / X4& *
X%]
X% / X4& * X%]
Set DNS server IP
address
EX% DI}
Ipd•X%]
View DNS server IP
address
E DI}
X%]
Set verbose mode
EX1) CV}
ECV}
E CC}
Vrb X1)]
View Verbose mode
Get connection count
In all CISG commands, the
first X% represents the IP
address, X4& represents
the subnet mask, and the
second X% represents the
gateway IP address.
X1)]
{number of connections}]
Password and Security Settings
Set admin password
Ipa•X2)]
Clear admin password
Ipa•]
EX1( CA}
E•CA}
View admin password
E CA}
Set user password
EX1( CU}
Clear user password
E•CU}
View user password
E CU}
Query session’s security E CK}
level
X2)]
Ipu•X2)]
Ipu•]
X2)]
X2#]
NOTE: The factory configured password for this device has been set to the device serial number.
Passwords are case sensitive.
KEY:
X% =
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx . Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are optional in setting values and are suppressed in responses.
X1) =
Verbose/Response Mode
0 = Clear/none (default for Telnet/IP)
1 = Verbose mode (default for RS-232 and USB)
2 = Tagged responses for queries
3 = Verbose mode and tagged responses for queries
X1( =
Password
0-128 characters. All man-readable characters are permitted except “|”.
Password cannot be a single space. Passwords are case-sensitive.
X2) =
Reading Password
Responds with 4 asterisks (****) if password exists and empty if not,
instead of actual password.
X2# =
Connection Security Level
11 = User
12 = Administrator
X4^ =
X4& =
NIC Number
Network Interface Card number 1 or 2 (only V-models have 2 NICs)
Prefix (subnet mask bits)
Subnet 255.255.0.0 is represented as a Prefix value of /16
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
135
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Change/Create
directory
E path/directory/
CJ}
Dir • path/directory/]
Back to root directory
E/CJ}
E..CJ}
E CJ}
Dir •/]
Erase current directory
and contained files
E/EF}
Ddl]
Erase current directory
and subdirectories
E//EF}
Ddl]
List files from current
directory
E DF}
filenamex•date/time
•length]
Additional description
Directories
Up one directory
View current directory
Dir • path/directory/]
path/directory/]
File Commands
filenamex•date/time
•length]
List files from current
directory and below
Responses for E DF}
and E LF} are in the
same format.
filenamex•date/time
•length]
E LF}
...
space_remaining•bytes
left]]
Load file to user flash
memory
Retrieve file from user
flash memory
E+UFfilesize,
filename}
E filenameSF}
Upl]
{responds with 4 bytes of
file size and unprocessed
data in file}
Backup/Restore Device Configuration
Save device
configuration (to
filesystem)
E 1*X3@ XF}
Cnfg1*X3@]
Restore device
configuration
E 0*X3@ XF}
Cnfg 0 * X3@]
KEY:
X3@
=
Configuration type
0 = IP configuration, 2 = device-specific parameters
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
136
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Additional description
NTP (Network Time Protocol)
Enable NTP to set the
time
E 1NTEN}
Nten1]
Disable NTP
E 0NTEN}
E2NTEN}
E NTEN}
EX% NTIP}
E•NTIP}
E NTIP}
E N X9#PMAP}
E N123PMAP}
E N0PMAP}
E NPMAP}
Nten0]
Sync NTP now
View NTP status
Set NTP IP address
Clear NTP IP address
View NTP IP address
Set NTP port map
Reset NTP port map
Disable NTP port
View NTP port map
Nten2]
X3!]
Ntip X%]
Ntip]
X%]
PmapN X9#]
PmapN00123]
PmapN00000]
X9#]
Port Assignment
Set telnet port map
Reset telnet port map
Disable telnet port
View telnet port map
Set web port map
Reset web port map
Disable web port map
View web port map
Set SNMP port map
Reset SNMP port map
Disable SNMP port
View SNMP port map
Set SSH port map
Reset SSH port map
Disable SSH port
View SSH port map
Set SSL port map
Reset SSL port map
Disable SSL port
EX9#MT}
E 23MT}
E 0MT}
E MT}
EX9#MH}
E 80MH}
E 0MH}
E MH}
E A X9#PMAP}
E A161PMAP}
E A0PMAP}
E APMAP}
E B X9#PMAP}
E B22023PMAP}
E B0PMAP}
E BPMAP}
E S X9#PMAP}
E S443PMAP}
E S0PMAP}
Pmt X9#]
Pmt00023]
Pmt00000]
X9#]
Pmh X9#]
Pmh00080]
Pmh00000]
X9#]
PmapA X9#]
PmapA00161]
PmapA00000]
X9#]
PmapB X9#]
PmapB22023]
PmapB00000]
X9#]
PmapS X9#]
PmapS00443]
PmapS00000]
KEY:
X% =
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx . Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are op-
=
NTP Status
0 = disabled (default), 1 = enabled.
Ethernet Port Number
0 = off, custom port numbers must be 1024 or higher.
X3!
X9# =
tional in setting values.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
137
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Additional description
Port Assignment (continued)
View SSL port map
Set FTP port map
Reset FTP port map
Disable FTP port
View FTP port map
Set TFTP port map
Reset TFTP port map
Disable TFTP port map
View TFTP port map
E SPMAP}
E F X9#PMAP}
E F21PMAP}
E F0PMAP}
E FPMAP}
E T X9# PMAP}
E T69PMAP}
E T0PMAP}
E TPMAP}
X9#]
PmapF X9#]
PmapF00021]
PmapF00000]
X9#]
PmapT X9#]
PmapT00069]
PmapT00000]
X9#]
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
Set unit contact
Set unit contact to
default
View unit contact
Set unit location
Set unit location to
default
View unit location
E C X4* SNMP}
E C•SNMP}
SnmpC* X4*]
E CSNMP}
E L X4* SNMP}
E L•SNMP}
X4*]
SnmpC*
Not•Specified]
SnmpL* X4*]
SnmpL*
Not•Specified]
E LSNMP}
E P X4* SNMP}
SnmpP* X4*]
Set community public to
default
E P•SNMP}
SnmpP*public]
View community public
E PSNMP}
E X X4* SNMP}
X4*]
SnmpX* X4*]
Set community private
to default
E XSNMP•X4*}
SnmpX*private]
View community private
E XSNMP}
E E1SNMP}
X4*]
SnmpE*1]
Disable SNMP access
and traps
E E0SNMP}
SnmpE*0]
View SNMP access
setting
E ESNMP}
X8#]
Set community public
(read-only)
Set community private
(read/write)
Enable SNMP access
and traps
X4*]
KEY:
X% =
X4* =
X8# =
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx . Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are optional
in setting values.
Text
Up to 64 characters.
SNMP Access
0 = disabled (default), 1 = enabled
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
138
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
E 1BOOT}
E 2BOOT}
Boot1]
Additional description
Reboot Commands
Reboot system
Reboot network
Boot2]
Serial Host Control Port Mode
Standard host control
(SIS)
EX! *1HSTM}
Hstm X! *1]
Device control (no SIS)
EX! *2HSTM}
EX! *0HSTM}
EX! HSTM}
Hstm X! *2]
Disable port
Query port mode
Hstm X! *0]
X8%]
Ping
Execute test
E {address/name}
PING}
E 192.168.254.254
PING}
Example:
If ping fails to get reply
from address
{address}*{bytes}*
{ttl}*{time}]
192.168.254.254*64*
64*3.469
{address}*0*0*0]
Timezone and Daylight Settings
Set time zone
View current time zone
List all time zones
E {zone name}* TZON} Tzon•{zone name,
description}]
{zone
name,
E TZON}
description}]
{zone name,
E *TZON}
description}]
...]
...]]
KEY:
X! =
X8% =
Port Number
01 (always 01 for DMP 128 FlexPlus)
Port Mode
0 = disabled, 1 = standard (default), 2 = device
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
139
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
EX5@ GPIT}
E X5@*X5% GPOT}
X5# *X5$]
X5^*X5&]
Additional description
Digital I/O
Get input status
Get output status
NOTE: Variables shown in the table above, but not listed at the bottom of this page, are listed on the next page.
KEY:
X5@ =
X5# =
Digital I/O Channel
1 through 2
Action Type
0 = No action/off
Mutes
1 = Level trigger (low mutes)
2 = Level trigger (high mutes)
3 = Edge trigger (high to low mutes, low to high unmutes)
4 = Edge trigger (high to low unmutes, low to high mutes)
5 = Toggle trigger (high to low toggles mute)
6 = Toggle trigger (low to high toggles mute)
Group Mutes
7 = Level trigger (low mutes)
8 = Level trigger (high mutes)
9 = Edge trigger (high to low mutes, low to high unmutes)
10 = Edge trigger (high to low unmutes, low to high mutes)
11 = Toggle trigger (high to low toggles mute)
12 = Toggle trigger (low to high toggles mute)
Macros
13 = Edge trigger (high to low starts macro)
14 = Edge trigger (low to high starts macro)
Presets
15 = Edge trigger (high to low recalls preset)
16 = Edge trigger (low to high recalls preset)
X5$ =
Varies according to action
type
Mutes
Input number for muting. If X5# is not specified, muting matches the
input with the corresponding I/O channel number.
Group Mutes
Group member for muting. If X5# is not specified, muting matches the
group with the corresponding I/O channel number.
Macros
Macro number. If X5# is not specified, the macro number defaults to
the corresponding I/O channel number.
Presets
Preset number. If X5# is not provided, the preset number defaults to
the corresponding I/O channel number.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
140
KEY:
X& =
X2@ =
Dante Device Name
Extron Remote Connection
Mode
0 = Disconnect
1 = Connect
X5% =
X5^ =
Digital Output
1
Output Mode
0 = Output always high
1 = Output always low
Mutes
2 = Mute high
3 = Unmute high
Group Mutes
4 = Group mute high
5 = Group unmute high
Macros
6 = Macro started set high once (blink)
7 = Macro started set low once (blink)
Presets
8 = Preset recalled set high once (blink)
9 = Preset recalled set low once (blink)
Automix Gate Status
10 = Automix gate on (>1024) set high
11 = Automix gate on (>1024) set low
Signal Presence
12 = Signal presence (>-40dBFS) set high
13 = Signal presence (>-40dBFS) set low
X5& =
Varies according to output
mode
Mutes
Input number for monitoring. If X5^ is not specified, monitoring
defaults to the input with the corresponding I/O channel number.
Group Mutes
Group member for mute monitoring. If X5^ is not specified, muting
matches the group with the corresponding I/O channel number.
Macros
Macro number. If X5^ is not specified, the macro number defaults
to the corresponding I/O channel number.
Presets
Preset number. If X5^ is not provided, the preset number defaults
to the corresponding I/O channel number.
Automix Gate Status
Input number for automix gate monitoring. If X5^ is not specified, the input number defaults to the corresponding I/O channel
number.
Signal Presence
Input Number for signal presence monitoring. If X5^ is not specified, the input number defaults to the corresponding I/O channel
number.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
141
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
EX5(, X6$ NI}
EX6) , X6$ NL}
EX6!, X6$ NE}
EX6@, X6$ NO}
EX6#, X6$ NX}
EX5*, X6$ NG}
Nmi X5(,X6$]
Additional description
Write Names
Write input name
Write virtual return name
Write EXP input name
Write output name
Write EXP output name
Write preset name
NmlX6) ,X6$]
Nei X6! ,X6$]
Nmo X6@ ,X6$]
NexX6# ,X6$]
Nmg X5* ,X6$]
View Names
View input name
EX5( NI}
View virtual return name EX6) NL}
View EXP input name
EX6! NE}
View output name
EX6@ NO}
View EXP output name EX6# NX}
View preset name
EX5* NG}
X6$]
X6$]
X6$]
X6$]
X6$]
X6$]
Recall Presets
Recall Preset
X5*.
Rpr X5*]
Reset presets and
names
E ZG}
Zpg]
Reset individual preset
EX5* ZG}
E ZXXX}
Zpg X5*]
Reset to Factory Defaults
System reset
(factory default)
Reset flash file system
Zpx]
E ZFFF}
Absolute reset including E ZQQQ}
Zpf]
Reset all device settings
and delete files
Zpy]
IP settings
E ZY}
Zpq]
Reset excludes IP address,
subnet mask, gateway IP
address, unit name, DHCP,
and port mapping in order
to preserve communication
with the device.
KEY:
X5*
X5(
X6)
X6!
X6@
X6#
X6$
=
Preset number
1 through 32
=
Input number
1 through 20 (inputs 13-20 are Aux inputs 1-8)
=
Virtual return number
1 through 16
=
EXP input number
1 through 16
=
Output number
1 through 16 (outputs 9 through 16 are Aux outputs 1-8)
=
EXP output number
1 through 16
=
New Name
Invalid characters = ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ` “ : ; | \ and ?
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
142
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Set file to slot
association
E A X6^ * X6% CPLY}
CplyA X6^ * X6%]
Clear file to slot
association
E A X6^ *•CPLY}
CplyA X6^ *•]
View file to slot
association
E A X6^ CPLY}
X6%]
Start playback on a
specific player
EX6^ *1PLAY}
Play X6^ *1]
Stop playback on a
specific player
EX6^ *0PLAY}
Play X6^*0]
Player status
Set player repeat
EX6^ PLAY}
E M X6^ *X6& CPLY}
X6*]
CplyM X6^ *X6&]
Get player repeat status
E M X6^ CPLY}
Playthrough finished
Unsolicited
X6&]
Play X6^ *0]
Additional description
Player File Management
Player Commands
Turning off repeat during
playback will stop playback
after current playthrough.
Macro Commands
Run macro
Set power-on macro
E R X6( MCRO}
E K X6( MCRO}
E S X6( MCRO}
E A X6( * X7! MCRO}
E A X6( MCRO}
E P X6( MCRO}
X7)]
McroA X6( * X7!]
X7!]
McroP X6(]
Get power-on macro
E PMCRO}
X6(]
Kill macro
Get macro status
Set macro name
Get macro name
McroR X6(]
McroK X6(]
Using 0 for X6( clears
power-on macro
assignment.
Asynchronous Macro Responses
Macro started
McroSTARTED X6(]
Macro finished
McroFINISHED X6(]
Macro failed
McroFAILED X6(* X7)]
Macro killed
McroKILLED X6(* X7)]
KEY:
X6%
X6^
X6&
X6*
X6(
X7)
X7!
=
Audio file name
Valid characters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _
=
Player ID
1 through 8
=
Repeat status
0 = Play once, 1 = Repeat
=
Play state
0 = Stopped, 1 = Playing
=
Macro number
1 through 64. Response will be padded with a leading 0.
=
Macro status
0 = Macro idle
=
Macro name
24 characters maximum (A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and “-”)
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
143
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Additional description
Dante Control and Configuration
The following commands configure the DMP 128 FlexPlus to listen for and pass through SIS commands meant for
Extron AXI 02 AT, AXI 22 AT, and AXI 44 AT endpoints.
NOTE: The DMP must be set to Verbose mode 2/3 when using the Dante Control and Configuration
commands.
Query available remote
devices
E A EXPR}
•X&]X&]...]]
Verbose 2/3:
ExprA•X&]
X&]...]]
Enable remote
connection for listening
E CX&*X2@EXPR}
X&*X2@]
Verbose 2/3:
ExprCX&*X2@]
(All listening disabled
when DMP Dante module
rebooted)
Read remote
connection listening
status
E CX&EXPR}
X2@]
Verbose 2/3:
ExprCX&*X2@]
Query remote devices
being listened to
E L EXPR}
•X&]X&]...]]
Verbose 2/3:
ExprL•X&]
X&]...]]
Send command to
remote device
{dante@X&:X9*}}
example command:
{dante@AXI02-XTPRoomA:wg40000*10AU}|
Verbose 2/3:
{dante@X&}X9(]
example response:
{dante@AXI-XTP-RoomA}
DsG40000*10]
KEY:
X& =
X2@ =
Dante Device Name
Device names are not case sensitive
Extron Remote Connection
Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
X9*
X9( =
SIS command
SIS command to be sent to remote dante-controlled device
SIS command response
Response from remote dante-controlled device, tagged by DMP
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
144
DSP SIS Commands
Many digital signal processor (DSP) functions such as gain, mute, and group masters can
be controlled using SIS commands. These commands follow the same general rules as
basic SIS commands but the variables can be more complex. Also, an understanding of the
audio signal flow is helpful for using audio DSP SIS commands. The following gain blocks
are addressable via SIS commands:
• Mic/Line Input (gain and mute)
• Virtual Return (gain and mute)
• Aux Input (gain, mute, and source)
• Post-mixer (gain only)
• Pre-mixer (gain and mute)
• Output (attenuation and mute)
• Mix-points (gain and mute)
Symbol Definitions
]
}
•
|
E
=
Carriage return/line feed
=
Carriage return (no line feed)
=
Space character
=
Pipe (can be used interchangeably with the } character)
=
Escape key
W
=
Can be used interchangeably with the E character
X7@ = Gain and trim control
X7# = Level value
See Object ID (OID) Number Tables on page 154.
Level values use a 10x multiplier system to set gain via SIS
command. For example, if the desired gain value is +10.3 dB,
the SIS value would be 103 (10.3 x 10), if the desired gain value
is -8.2 dB, the SIS value would be -82 (-8.2 x 10), and so on.
-12.0 dB to +12.0 dB, (-120 to 120) in 0.1 dB increments.
-18.0 dB to +80 dB, (-180 to 800) in 0.1 dB increments.
-100.0 dB to +12.0 dB, (-1000 to 120) in 0.1 dB increments.
NOTE: The integers only need to be signed if they are a
negative number.
X7$ = Mute status
0 = unmute
1 = mute (see Object ID (OID) Number Tables on page 154)
X7% = Group master group number
X7^ = Group fader setting
01 through 64
dB, value in 0.1 dB increments using a 10x multiplier and
negative numbers, but not decimal places. The valid range
depends on the type of gain block that is assigned to the group
number X7% specified in the command:
-180 to 800 (-18.0 dB to +80 dB)
-1000 to 120 (-100.0 dB to +12.0 dB)
-1000 to 120 (-100.0 dB to +12.0 dB)
-120 to 120 (-12.0 dB to +12.0 dB)
-1000 to 0 (-100.0 dB to +0.0 dB)
NOTE: Leading zeros are ignored.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
145
X7& = Group fader increment
X7* = Group fader soft limit
X7( = Group type
dB value, in 0.1 dB increments, to raise or lower a group fader
dB value, in 0.1 dB increments. The valid range X7^ must be
within the range for the gain block grouped in X7%.
6 = gain
12 = mute
Special Characters
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The device will not
accept the following characters as a part of preset names, the device names, passwords, or
locally created file names.
The DMP 128 FlexPlus rejects the following characters:
{space (OK for names)} + ~ , @ = ‘ { } [ ] < > ` “ ; : \ ?
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
146
Command and Response Table for DSP SIS Commands
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Additional description
Audio level control
NOTE: The command format is the same regardless of the control point, but the acceptable gain range varies
depending on the control point.
• The mic/line input gain range is -18 dB to +80 dB in 0.1 dB increments when the source is set to analog.
• The mic/line input gain range is -18 dB to +24 dB in 0.1 dB increments when the source is set to a digital
input (for more on changing the input source, see Input Gain Block on page 23).
• The pre-mixer gain and virtual return gain range is -100 dB to +12 dB in 0.1 dB increments.
• The post-mixer trim gain range is -12 dB to +12 dB in 0.1 dB increments. Post mixer trim cannot be muted.
• The output attenuation gain range is -100 dB to 0 dB in 0.1 dB increments.
• All responses are shown with the DMP 128 in Verbose mode 2 or 3.
Set gain level
E G X7@ * X7# AU}
DsG X7@ * X7#]
Set gain on OID X7@ to a
value of X7# dB.
Example 1
(mic/line input 1):
E G40000*120 AU}
DsG40000*120]
Set the mic/line input 1 to
a level of +12.0 dB.
Example 2
(pre-mixer gain 1):
E G40100*-8 AU}
DsG40100*-8]
Set pre-mixer gain 1 to a
value of -0.8 dB.
E G X7@ AU}
DsG X7@ * X7#]
Gain on OID X7@ is set to a
value of X7# dB.
Example 1
(mic/line input 1) :
E G40000AU}
DsG40000*550]
Mic/line input 1 gain is set
to a value of +55.0 dB.
Example 2
(post-mixer gain 1) :
E G60100AU}
DsG60100*55]
Output 2, post mixer gain
is set to a value of +5.5 dB.
Read gain level
NOTE: If the input source is set to a digital input (AT or Expansion input), use the H parameter instead of
the G parameter when setting or reading input gain level (for more on changing the input source, see
Input Gain Block on page 23).
Audio Mute
Audio mute
E M X7@ *1AU}
E M X7@*0AU}
E M X7@ AU}
DsM X7@*1]
Mute audio at X7@.
DsM X7@*0]
Unmute audio at X7@.
E Z X7@ *1AU}
Disable phantom power E Z X7@ *0AU}
Phantom power status E Z X7@ AU}
DsZ X7@*1]
Audio unmute
Mute status
DsM X7@*X7$]
Phantom Power
Enable phantom power
DsZ X7@*0]
DsZ X7@*X7$]
Phantom power is only
available on mic/line inputs
1 through 8.
KEY:
X7@ =
X7# =
Target OID
See Object ID (OID) Number Tables on page 154
Gain value
Levels use a 10x multiplier system with no decimal spaces. For
example, a level of +10.4 dB would be entered as 104 and a level
of -3.2 dB would be entered as -32.
X7$ =
Mute/Phantom power
status
0 = disabled
1 = enabled
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
147
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Additional description
Audio Group Master Commands
NOTES:
• For information on configuring groups, see Groups on page 69.
• A group must have assigned members for these commands to have an effect.
• For X7^, a positive (+) value is assumed unless a negative (-) value is specified.
• If entering an X7^ value outside the valid range for the group or outside the soft limits, the DMP 128 responds
with an E13 error (invalid parameter).
•
X7^, X7&, and X7* values can be sent without leading zeroes. Responses are always 5 digits in length.
Set a group fader to a
E D X7%*X7^ GRPM}
GrpmD X7%*X7^]
value of X7^.
Set group 2 fader control
Example:
E D2*-239GRPM}
GrpmD2*-293]
Set a group fader value
to -29.3 dB.
Increment a group fader
value
E D X7%*X7& +GRPM}
GrpmD X7%*X7^]
Increase the level of X7% by
X7& dB.
E D2*30+GRPM}
GrpmD2*-263]
Raise the group 2 fader
3 dB from -29.3 dB (set in
example above) to -26.3
dB.
Decrement a group
fader value
E D X7%*X7&-GRPM}
GrpmD X7%*X7^]
Decrease the level of the
X7% group fader by X7&
dB.
View the group fader
value
E D X7% GRPM}
GrpmD X7%*X7^]
In verbose modes 0 and 1,
the response is simplified
to X7^].
Mute a group
E D X7%*1GRPM}
GrpmD X7%*1]
Mute all blocks in group
X7%.
Unmute a group
E D X7%*0GRPM}
GrpmD X7%*0]
Unmute all blocks in group
X7%.
View a group mute
value
E D X7% GRPM}
GrpmD X7%*X7$]
For group masters, X7$ is
always expressed as an
unsigned or negative value.
Example:
KEY:
X7$ =
Mute status
0 = unmuted
1 = muted
X7% =
Group master group
number
1 through 64
X7^ =
Group fader level
dB value in 0.1 dB steps, using negative numbers and
eliminating decimal places using a 10x multiplier. -100.0dB to
+80.0 dB is represented by -1000 to 800. The valid range depends
on the type of gain or trim block assigned to the group number
(X7%).
X7& =
Group fader
increase/decrease
dB value in 0.1 dB steps to raise or lower a group fader. Gain uses
10x multiplier (+10 dB = 100+). + or - goes after the number.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
148
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Additional description
Audio Group Master Commands (continued)
E L X7%*X7*upper*
X7*lowerGRPM}
E L2*60*-60 GRPM}
GrpmL X7%*X7**X7*]
Set the groups soft limits to
X7*upper and X7*lower.
GrpmL2*60*-60]
Set the upper soft limit for
the group 2 fader to +6.0
dB and the lower limit to
-6.0 dB.
View soft limits
E L X7% GRPM}
GrpmL X7%*X7**X7*]
In verbose modes 0 and 1,
the response is simplified
to X7**X7*].
View group type
E P X7% GRPM}
E O X7% GRPM}
GrpmP X7%*X7(]
Set soft limits
Example:
View group members
GrpmO X7%*X7@1*X7@2
*...*X7@16]
X7@ is the control address.
In verbose modes 0 and 1,
the response is simplified
to X7@1 * X7@2 *...*
X7@16]
KEY:
X7@ =
X7% =
Target OID
See Object ID (OID) Number Tables on page 154
Group master group
number
1 through 64
X7* =
X7( =
Group fader soft limit
dB value in 0.1 dB steps. Gain uses 10x multiplier (+10 dB = 100+).
Group type
6 = gain
12 = mute
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
149
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
E D X7@*X8& AU}
E D X7@ AU}
E M X7@*X7$ AU}
E M X7@ AU}
E G X7@*X7# AU}
E G X7@ AU}
DsD X7@*X8&]
E D X7@*X9) AU}
E D X7@ AU}
E M X7@*X7$ AU}
E M X7@ AU}
E G X7@*X7# AU}
E G X7@ AU}
DsD X7@*X9)]
Additional description
Aux Input 1 through 8
Set source mode
Get source mode
Set mute
Get mute status
Set analog gain
Read gain
X8&]
DsM X7@*X7$]
X7$]
DsG X7@*X7#]
X7#]
Aux Output 1 through 8
Set output mode
Get output mode
Set mute
Get mute status
Set attenuation
Read attenuation level
X9)]
DsM X7@*X7$]
X7$]
DsG X7@*X7#]
X7#]
Metering
NOTE: Metering is available on all input gain and output attenuation blocks.
Read meter level
Enable meter updates
E V X7@ AU}
E V X7@*X8* AU}
X8**X8(]
DsV X7@*X8*]
-150.0 dBFS to 0.0 dBFS
Automixer Gate Monitoring
Get current automixer
gate status
E J X7@AU}
Unsolicited automixer
gate status update
This is enabled by selecting DsV X7@*X9@*X9%*X9^]
the Automix dialog Monitor
Gate checkbox (see
Input Automix Block on
page 38).
X9!]
Signal Level Monitoring (SLM)
SLM tracks when the signal at a metered gain OID crosses a set threshold level. When SLM is enabled for an OID,
an unsolicited message is sent when the threshold level is crossed. The response includes the OID, meter on/
off status, level after the threshold was crossed, and if the level was going up or down when the threshold was
crossed.
Set SLM status
Get current threshold
status
E J X7@*X9$ AU}
E J X7@ AU}
Unsolicited meter value
DsJ X7@*X9$]
X9$]
DsV X7@*X9@*X9%*X9^]
KEY:
• Variables not defined on this page are defined on the following page.
X7@ =
X7# =
Target OID
See Object ID (OID) Number Tables on page 154
Gain value
dB value in 0.1 dB steps. Gain uses 10x multiplier (+10 dB = 100,
-3.4 dB = -34, and so on).
X7$ =
Mute status
0 = off, 1 = engaged
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
150
KEY:
X8& =
Source mode
0 = disabled
1 = File/Tone Playback: Player 1
2 = File/Tone Playback: Player 2
3 = File/Tone Playback: Player 3
4 = File/Tone Playback: Player 4
5 = File/Tone Playback: Player 5
6 = File/Tone Playback: Player 6
7 = File/Tone Playback: Player 7
8 = File/Tone Playback: Player 8
9 = USB 1 Rx: Left Channel
10 = USB 1 Rx: Right Channel
11 = USB 2 Rx: Left Channel
12 = USB 2 Rx: Right Channel
17 = VoIP Line 1 Rx
18 = VoIP Line 2 Rx
19 = VoIP Line 3 Rx
20 = VoIP Line 4 Rx
21 = VoIP Line 5 Rx
22 = VoIP Line 6 Rx
23 = VoIP Line 7 Rx
24 = VoIP Line 8 Rx
X8* =
X8( =
X9) =
Updates status
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
Meter level
-150.0 dBFS to 0.0 dBFS (1500 to 0000)
Output mode
0 = disabled
1 = USB 1 Tx: Left Channel
2 = USB 1 Tx: Right Channel
3 = USB 2 Tx: Left Channel
4 = USB 2 Tx: Right Channel
9 = VoIP Line 1 Tx
10 = VoIP Line 2 Tx
11 = VoIP Line 3 Tx
12 = VoIP Line 4 Tx
13 = VoIP Line 5 Tx
14 = VoIP Line 6 Tx
15 = VoIP Line 7 Tx
16 = VoIP Line 8 Tx
X9! =
X9@ =
X9# =
Gate monitoring status
0 = gate monitoring disabled, 1024 = gate monitoring enabled
Meter status
0 = meter off, 1 = meter on
Signal level when gate is
opened or closed
0000 - 1023 = gate closed, ≥1024 = gate open (Automixer Gate
Monitoring on page 150 for more information).
X9$ =
Monitoring threshold
0 = disabled, 0001-2000 = signal threshold to monitor (-0.1 to -200.0
dBFS).
X9% =
X9^ =
Meter value
0000-2000 = 0.0 to -200.0 dBFS
Meter relative to threshold
0 = above threshold, 1 = equal to or below threshold
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
151
Command and Response Table for VoIP SIS Commands
NOTE: All SIS responses in this section are in Verbose modes 2 and 3. In Verbose modes 0 or 1,
responses will not be tagged.
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
E END X!,X@ VOIP}
E END X! VOIP}
VoipEND X!,X@,X$]
E DIAL X!,X# VOIP}
E DD X!,X@,X# VOIP}
E ANS X!,X@ VOIP}
E REJ X!,X@ VOIP}
E HOLD X!,X@,X2$
VOIP}
VoipDIAL X!,X#,X$]
Additional description
Call Control
End call
End call on all
appearances
Dial string
Dial digits
Answer
Reject
Hold
VoipEND X!,1,X$]
VoipDD X!,X@,X#,X$]
VoipANS X!,X@,X$]
VoipREJ X!,X@,X$]
VoipHOLD X!,X@,X2$,
X$]
Call Settings
Set do not disturb
Get do not disturb
status
Set auto answer
Get auto answer status
Set auto answer delay
Get auto answer delay
status
E DND X!,X& VOIP}
E DND X! VOIP}
VoipDND X!,X&]
E AA X!,X* VOIP}
E AA X! VOIP}
E AD X!,X( VOIP}
E AD X! VOIP}
VoipAA X!,X*]
VoipDND X!,X&]
VoipAA X!,X*]
VoipAD X!,X(]
VoipAD X!,X(]
KEY:
X!
X@
X#
X$
X&
X*
X(
X2$
=
Line number
1 through 8
=
Appearance number
1 through 8 (where 1 is the originating two-party call)
=
Phone number
No spaces allowed. Valid characters are 0 - 9, *, #
=
Return code
0 = ok, 1 = fail
=
Operating state
1 = enable, 0 = disable
=
Auto answer mode
0 = disabled, 1 = delay (seconds), 2 = follow SIP header
=
Delay value
Represents time in seconds.
=
Hold status
0 = off, 1 = on-hold
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
152
Command
ASCII command
Response
(host to device)
(device to host)
Additional description
Unsolicited Responses
Busy
VoipBusy X!,X@]
Rejected
VoipRejected X!,X@]
Unreachable
VoipUnreachable X!,
X@]
Terminated
VoipTerminated X!,
X@]
Incoming
VoipIncoming X!,
X@,X1),X2#,X1!]
Registration status
VoipRS X!,X1@]
Line Status
VoipLS X!,X1$,X1$,
X1$,X1$,X1$,X1$,
X1$,X1$]
Each X1$ entry represents
an appearance of the line.
Line Status Queries (get only)
Registration status
E RS X! VOIP}
E LS X!,X@ VOIP}
E LS X! VOIP}
VoipRS X!,X1@]
VoipNAME X!,X@,X1),X2#]
Jitter Rx
E NAME X!,X@ VOIP}
E DUR X!,X@ VOIP}
E CD X!,X@ VOIP}
E JR X!,X@ VOIP}
Line Extension
E LE X! VOIP}
VoipLE X!,X2#,X1)]
Line status
Line status (without
index)
Caller name
Duration
Codec
VoipLS X!,X@,X1$]
VoipLS X!,X1$,X1$,
X1$,X1$,X1$,X1$,
X1$,X1$]
Each X1$ entry represents
an appearance of the line.
VoipDUR X!,X@,X1^]
VoipCD X!,X@,X1&]
VoipJR X!,X@,X1*,
X1(,X2@]
KEY:
X!
X@
X1)
X1!
X1@
=
Line number
1-8
=
Appearance number
1 - 8 (where 1 is the originating two-party call)
=
Display name
Any commas returned will be displayed as hyphens (-)
=
Timestamp
Example: Date: Thu, 08 Sep 2017 16:24:35 GMT
=
Registration status
0 = Unregistered, 1 = Registered to 1st proxy, 2 = Registered to
2nd proxy, 3 = None, 4 = Not registered (failed)
Call status
0 = None, 1 = Inactive, 2 = Active, 3 = On Hold, 4 = Incoming,
5 = Outgoing
=
Duration
HH:MM:SS
=
Codec name
Alphanumeric characters only
=
Jitter in milliseconds
=
Packet drop count
=
Total packet count
=
Extension number
X1$ =
X1^
X1&
X1*
X1(
X2@
X2#
Valid characters are 0 - 9, *, #
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
153
Object ID (OID) Number Tables
The following tables list input and output gain OIDs. For mix-point OID tables, see
Mix-point OIDs on page 159.
Input Path OIDs
Mic/Line Input Gain
Block
OID
Mic/Line Pre-mixer
Gain Block
OID
Mic/Line Input 1
40000
Mic/Line Input 1
40100
Mic/Line Input 2
40001
Mic/Line Input 2
40101
Mic/Line Input 3
40002
Mic/Line Input 3
40102
Mic/Line Input 4
40003
Mic/Line Input 4
40103
FlexInput 5
40004
FlexInput 5
40104
FlexInput 6
40005
FlexInput 6
40105
FlexInput 7
40006
FlexInput 7
40106
FlexInput 8
40007
FlexInput 8
40107
FlexInput 9
40008
FlexInput 9
40108
FlexInput 10
40009
FlexInput 10
40109
FlexInput 11
40010
FlexInput 11
40110
FlexInput 12
40011
FlexInput 12
40111
Aux Input Gain Block
OID
Aux Input Pre‑mixer
Gain Block
OID
Aux Input 1
40012
Aux Input 1
40112
Aux Input 2
40013
Aux Input 2
40113
Aux Input 3
40014
Aux Input 3
40114
Aux Input 4
40015
Aux Input 4
40115
Aux Input 5
40016
Aux Input 5
40116
Aux Input 6
40017
Aux Input 6
40117
Aux Input 7
40018
Aux Input 7
40118
Aux Input 8
40019
Aux Input 8
40119
Virtual Return
Pre‑mixer Gain Block
OID
Virtual Return
Pre‑mixer Gain Block
OID
Virtual Return A
50100
Virtual Return I
50108
Virtual Return B
50101
Virtual Return J
50109
Virtual Return C
50102
Virtual Return K
50110
Virtual Return D
50103
Virtual Return L
50111
Virtual Return E
50104
Virtual Return M
50112
Virtual Return F
50105
Virtual Return N
50113
Virtual Return G
50106
Virtual Return O
50114
Virtual Return H
50107
Virtual Return P
50115
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
154
Expansion Bus
Pre-mixer Gain Block
OID
Expansion Bus
Pre-mixer Gain Block
OID
AT In 1
50200
AT In 25
50224
AT In 2
50201
AT In 26
50225
AT In 3
50202
AT In 27
50226
AT In 4
50203
AT In 28
50227
AT In 5
50204
AT In 29
50228
AT In 6
50205
AT In 30
50229
AT In 7
50206
AT In 31
50230
AT In 8
50207
AT In 32
50231
AT In 9
50208
AT In 33 / EXP 1
50232
AT In 10
50209
AT In 34 / EXP 2
50233
AT In 11
50210
AT In 35 / EXP 3
50234
AT In 12
50211
AT In 36 / EXP 4
50235
AT In 13
50212
AT In 37 / EXP 5
50236
AT In 14
50213
AT In 38 / EXP 6
50237
AT In 15
50214
AT In 39 / EXP 7
50238
AT In 16
50215
AT In 40 / EXP 8
50239
AT In 17
50216
AT In 41 / EXP 9
50240
AT In 18
50217
AT In 42 / EXP 10
50241
AT In 19
50218
AT In 43 / EXP 11
50242
AT In 20
50219
AT In 44 / EXP 12
50243
AT In 21
50220
AT In 45 / EXP 13
50244
AT In 22
50221
AT In 46 / EXP 14
50245
AT In 23
50222
AT In 47 / EXP 15
50246
AT In 24
50223
AT In 48 / EXP 16
50247
Output Path OIDs
Line Output Post‑mixer
Trim Block
OID
Line Output
Attenuation Block
OID
Line Output 1
60100
Line Output 1
60000
Line Output 2
60101
Line Output 2
60001
Line Output 3
60102
Line Output 3
60002
Line Output 4
60103
Line Output 4
60003
Line Output 5
60104
Line Output 5
60004
Line Output 6
60105
Line Output 6
60005
Line Output 7
60106
Line Output 7
60006
Line Output 8
60107
Line Output 8
60007
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
155
Aux Output Post‑mixer
Trim Block
OID
Aux Output Gain Block
OID
Aux Output 1
60108
Aux Output 1
60008
Aux Output 2
60109
Aux Output 2
60009
Aux Output 3
60110
Aux Output 3
60010
Aux Output 4
60111
Aux Output 4
60011
Aux Output 5
60112
Aux Output 5
60012
Aux Output 6
60113
Aux Output 6
60013
Aux Output 7
60114
Aux Output 7
60014
Aux Output 8
60115
Aux Output 8
60015
EXP Output Post‑mixer
Trim Block
OID
EXP Output Post‑mixer
Trim Block
OID
EXP Output 1
60116
EXP Output 9
60124
EXP Output 2
60117
EXP Output 10
60125
EXP Output 3
60118
EXP Output 11
60126
EXP Output 4
60119
EXP Output 12
60127
EXP Output 5
60120
EXP Output 13
60128
EXP Output 6
60121
EXP Output 14
60129
EXP Output 7
60122
EXP Output 15
60130
EXP Output 8
60123
EXP Output 16
60131
EXP Output Attenuation
Block
OID
EXP Output
Attenuation Block
OID
EXP Output 1
60016
EXP Output 9
60024
EXP Output 2
60017
EXP Output 10
60025
EXP Output 3
60018
EXP Output 11
60026
EXP Output 4
60019
EXP Output 12
60027
EXP Output 5
60020
EXP Output 13
60028
EXP Output 6
60021
EXP Output 14
60029
EXP Output 7
60022
EXP Output 15
60030
EXP Output 8
60023
EXP Output 16
60031
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
156
Automixer OIDs
Mic/Line Input
Automixer OID
OID
Mic/Line Input
Automixer OID
OID
Mic/Line Automixer 1
59000
FlexInput 7
59006
Mic/Line Automixer 2
59001
FlexInput 8
59007
Mic/Line Automixer 3
59002
FlexInput 9
59008
Mic/Line Automixer 4
59003
FlexInput 10
59009
FlexInput 5
59004
FlexInput 11
59010
FlexInput 6
59005
FlexInput 12
59011
Aux Input Automixer
OID
OID
Aux Input Automixer
OID
OID
Aux Automixer 1
59012
Aux Automixer 5
59016
Aux Automixer 2
59013
Aux Automixer 6
59017
Aux Automixer 3
59014
Aux Automixer 7
59018
Aux Automixer 4
59015
Aux Automixer 8
59019
Expansion Bus
Automixer OID
OID
Expansion Bus
Automixer OID
OID
EXP Automixer 1
59020
EXP Automixer 9
59028
EXP Automixer 2
59021
EXP Automixer 10
59029
EXP Automixer 3
59022
EXP Automixer 11
59030
EXP Automixer 4
59023
EXP Automixer 12
59031
EXP Automixer 5
59024
EXP Automixer 13
59032
EXP Automixer 6
59025
EXP Automixer 14
59033
EXP Automixer 7
59026
EXP Automixer 15
59034
EXP Automixer 8
59027
EXP Automixer 16
59035
Expansion Bus
Automixer OID
OID
Expansion Bus
Automixer OID
OID
EXP Automixer 17
59036
EXP Automixer 25
59044
EXP Automixer 18
59037
EXP Automixer 26
59045
EXP Automixer 19
59038
EXP Automixer 27
59046
EXP Automixer 20
59039
EXP Automixer 28
59047
EXP Automixer 21
59040
EXP Automixer 29
59048
EXP Automixer 22
59041
EXP Automixer 30
59049
EXP Automixer 23
59042
EXP Automixer 31
59050
EXP Automixer 24
59043
EXP Automixer 32
59051
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
157
Expansion Bus
Automixer OID
OID
Expansion Bus
Automixer OID
OID
EXP Automixer 33
59052
EXP Automixer 41
59060
EXP Automixer 34
59053
EXP Automixer 42
59061
EXP Automixer 35
59054
EXP Automixer 43
59062
EXP Automixer 36
59055
EXP Automixer 44
59063
EXP Automixer 37
59056
EXP Automixer 45
59064
EXP Automixer 38
59057
EXP Automixer 46
59065
EXP Automixer 39
59058
EXP Automixer 47
59066
EXP Automixer 40
59059
EXP Automixer 48
59067
NOTE: Automixer OIDs are used only to read unsolicited automixer gate status
responses (see Automixer Gate Monitoring on page 150).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
158
Mix-point OIDs
NOTE: In these tables, inputs are listed vertically along the left side of the table and
outputs are listed horizontally across the top of the table.
Mic/Line and Digital Input to Analog and Aux Output Mix Matrix
Mic 1
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
Out 8
Aux
Out 1
Aux
Out 2
Aux
Out 3
Aux
Out 4
Aux
Out 5
Aux
Out 6
Aux
Out 7
Aux
Out 8
20000
20001
20002
20003
20004
20005
20006
20007
20008
20009
20010
20011
20012
20013
20014
20015
Mic 2
20100
20101
20102
20103
20104
20105
20106
20107
20108
20109
20110
20111
20112
20113
20114
20115
Mic 3
20200
20201
20202
20203
20204
20205
20206
20207
20208
20209
20210
20211
20212
20213
20214
20215
Mic 4
20300
20301
20302
20303
20304
20305
20306
20307
20308
20309
20310
20311
20312
20313
20314
20315
Digital 5
20400
20401
20402
20403
20404
20405
20406
20407
20408
20409
20410
20411
20412
20413
20414
20415
Digital 6
20500
20501
20502
20503
20504
20505
20506
20507
20508
20509
20510
20511
20512
20513
20514
20515
Digital 7
20600
20601
20602
20603
20604
20605
20606
20607
20608
20609
20610
20611
20612
20613
20614
20615
Digital 8
20700
20701
20702
20703
20704
20705
20705
20707
20708
20709
20710
20711
20712
20713
20714
20715
Digital 9
20800
20801
20802
20803
20804
20805
20806
20807
20808
20809
20810
20811
20812
20813
20814
20815
Digital 10
20900
20901
20902
20903
20904
20905
20906
20907
20908
20909
20910
20911
20912
20913
20914
20915
Digital 11
21000
21001
21002
21003
21004
21005
21006
21007
21008
21009
21010
21011
21012
21013
21014
21015
Digital 12
21100
21101
21102
21103
21104
21105
21106
21107
21108
21109
21110
21111
21112
21113
21114
21115
Mic/Line And Digital Input to EXP Output Mix Matrix
Mic 1
EXP
Out 1
EXP
Out 2
EXP
Out 3
EXP
Out 4
EXP
Out 5
EXP
Out 6
EXP
Out 7
EXP
Out 8
EXP
Out 9
EXP
Out 10
EXP
Out 11
EXP
Out 12
EXP
Out 13
EXP
Out 14
EXP
Out 15
EXP
Out 16
20032
20033
20034
20035
20036
20037
20038
20039
20040
20041
20042
20043
20044
20045
20046
20047
Mic 2
20132
20133
20134
20135
20136
20137
20138
20139
20140
20141
20142
20143
20144
20145
20146
20147
Mic 3
20232
20233
20234
20235
20236
20237
20238
20239
20240
20241
20242
20243
20244
20245
20246
20247
Mic 4
20332
20333
20334
20335
20336
20337
20338
20339
20340
20341
20342
20343
20344
20345
20346
20347
Digital 5
20432
20433
20434
20435
20436
20437
20438
20439
20440
20441
20442
20443
20444
20445
20446
20447
Digital 6
20532
20533
20534
20535
20536
20537
20538
20539
20540
20541
20542
20543
20544
20545
20546
20547
Digital 7
20632
20633
20634
20635
20636
20637
20638
20639
20640
20641
20642
20643
20644
20645
20646
20647
Digital 8
20732
20733
20734
20735
20736
20737
20738
20739
20740
20741
20742
20743
20744
20745
20746
20747
Digital 9
20832
20833
20834
20835
20836
20837
20838
20839
20840
20841
20842
20843
20844
20845
20846
20847
Digital 10
20932
20933
20934
20935
20936
20937
20938
20939
20940
20941
20942
20943
20944
20945
20946
20947
Digital 11
21032
21033
21034
21035
21036
21037
21038
21039
21040
21041
21042
21043
21044
21045
21046
21047
Digital 12
21132
21133
21134
21135
21136
21137
21138
21139
21140
21141
21142
21143
21144
21145
21146
21147
Mic/Line and Digital Input to Virtual Send Mix Matrix
Mic 1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
20016
20017
20018
20019
20020
20021
20022
20023
20024
20025
20026
20027
20028
20029
20030
20031
Mic 2
20116
20117
20118
20119
20120
20121
20122
20123
20124
20125
20126
20127
20128
20129
20130
20131
Mic 3
20216
20217
20218
20219
20220
20221
20222
20223
20224
20225
20226
20227
20228
20229
20230
20231
Mic 4
20316
20317
20318
20319
20320
20321
20322
20323
20324
20325
20326
20327
20328
20329
20330
20331
Digital 5
20416
20417
20418
20419
20420
20421
20422
20423
20424
20425
20426
20427
20428
20429
20430
20431
Digital 6
20516
20517
20518
20519
20520
20521
20522
20523
20524
20525
20526
20527
20528
20529
20530
20531
Digital 7
20616
20617
20618
20619
20620
20621
20622
20623
20624
20625
20626
20627
20628
20629
20630
20631
Digital 8
20716
20717
20718
20719
20720
20721
20722
20723
20724
20725
20726
20727
20728
20729
20730
20731
Digital 9
20816
20817
20818
20819
20820
20821
20822
20823
20824
20825
20826
20827
20828
20829
20830
20831
Digital 10
20916
20917
20918
20919
20920
20921
20922
20923
20924
20925
20926
20927
20928
20929
20930
20931
Digital 11
21016
21017
21018
21019
21020
21021
21022
21023
21024
21025
21026
21027
21028
21029
21030
21031
Digital 12
21116
21117
21118
21119
21120
21121
21122
21123
21124
21125
21126
21127
21128
21129
21130
21131
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
159
Aux Input to Analog and Aux Output Mix Matrix
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
Out 8
Aux
Out 1
Aux
Out 2
Aux
Out 3
Aux
Out 4
Aux
Out 5
Aux
Out 6
Aux
Out 7
Aux
Out 8
Aux 1
21200
21201
21202
21203
21204
21205
21206
21207
21208
21209
21210
21211
21212
21213
21214
21215
Aux 2
21300
21301
21302
21303
21304
21305
21306
21307
21308
21309
21310
21311
21312
21313
21314
21315
Aux 3
21400
21401
21402
21403
21404
21405
21406
21407
21408
21409
21410
21411
21412
21413
21414
21415
Aux 4
21500
21501
21502
21503
21504
21505
21506
21507
21508
21509
21510
21511
21512
21513
21514
21515
Aux 5
21600
21601
21602
21603
21604
21605
21606
21607
21608
21609
21610
21611
21612
21613
21614
21615
Aux 6
21700
21701
21702
21703
21704
21705
21706
21707
21708
21709
21710
21711
21712
21713
21714
21715
Aux 7
21800
21801
21802
21803
21804
21805
21806
21807
21808
21809
21810
21811
21812
21813
21814
21815
Aux 8
21900
21901
21902
21903
21904
21905
21906
21907
21908
21909
21910
21911
21912
21913
21914
21915
EXP
Out 12
EXP
Out 13
EXP
Out 14
EXP
Out 15
EXP
Out 16
Aux Input to EXP Output Mix Matrix
EXP
Out 1
EXP
Out 2
EXP
Out 3
EXP
Out 4
EXP
Out 5
EXP
Out 6
EXP
Out 7
EXP
Out 8
EXP
Out 9
EXP
Out 10
EXP
Out 11
Aux 1
21232
21233
21234
21235
21236
21237
21238
21239
21240
21241
21242
21243
21244
21245
21246
21247
Aux 2
21332
21333
21334
21335
21336
21337
21338
21339
21340
21341
21342
21343
21344
21345
21346
21347
Aux 3
21432
21433
21434
21435
21436
21437
21438
21439
21440
21441
21442
21443
21444
21445
21446
21447
Aux 4
21532
21533
21534
21535
21536
21537
21538
21539
21540
21541
21542
21543
21544
21545
21546
21547
Aux 5
21632
21633
21634
21635
21636
21637
21638
21639
21640
21641
21642
21643
21644
21645
21646
21647
Aux 6
21732
21733
21734
21735
21736
21737
21738
21739
21740
21741
21742
21743
21744
21745
21746
21747
Aux 7
21832
21833
21834
21835
21836
21837
21838
21839
21840
21841
21842
21843
21844
21845
21846
21847
Aux 8
21932
21933
21934
21935
21936
21937
21938
21939
21940
21941
21942
21943
21944
21945
21946
21947
Aux Input to Virtual Send Mix Matrix
Aux 1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
21216
21217
21218
21219
21220
21221
21222
21223
21224
21225
21226
21227
21228
21229
21230
21231
Aux 2
21316
21317
21318
21319
21320
21321
21322
21323
21324
21325
21326
21327
21328
21329
21330
21331
Aux 3
21416
21417
21418
21419
21420
21421
21422
21423
21424
21425
21426
21427
21428
21429
21430
21431
Aux 4
21516
21517
21518
21519
21520
21521
21522
21523
21524
21525
21526
21527
21528
21529
21530
21531
Aux 5
21616
21617
21618
21619
21620
21621
21622
21623
21624
21625
21626
21627
21628
21629
21630
21631
Aux 6
21716
21717
21718
21719
21720
21721
21722
21723
21724
21725
21726
21727
21728
21729
21730
21731
Aux 7
21816
21817
21818
21819
21820
21821
21822
21823
21824
21825
21826
21827
21828
21829
21830
21831
Aux 8
21916
21917
21918
21919
21920
21921
21922
21923
21924
21925
21926
21927
21928
21929
21930
21931
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
160
Virtual Return to Analog and Aux Output Mix Matrix
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
Out 8
Aux
Out 1
Aux
Out 2
Aux
Out 3
Aux
Out 4
Aux
Out 5
Aux
Out 6
Aux
Out 7
Aux
Out 8
Rtn A
22000
22001
22002
22003
22004
22005
22006
22007
22008
22009
22010
22011
22012
22013
22014
22015
Rtn B
22100
22101
22102
22103
22104
22105
22106
22107
22108
22109
22110
22111
22112
22113
22114
22115
Rtn C
22200
22201
22202
22203
22204
22205
22206
22207
22208
22209
22210
22211
22212
22213
22214
22215
Rtn D
22300
22301
22302
22303
22304
22305
22306
22307
22308
22309
22310
22311
22312
22313
22314
22315
Rtn E
22400
22401
22402
22403
22404
22405
22406
22407
22408
22409
22410
22411
22412
22413
22414
22415
Rtn F
22500
22501
22502
22503
22504
22505
22506
22507
22508
22509
22510
22511
22512
22513
22514
22515
Rtn G
22600
22601
22602
22603
22604
22605
22606
22607
22608
22609
22610
22611
22612
22613
22614
22615
Rtn H
22700
22701
22702
22703
22704
22705
22706
22707
22708
22709
22710
22711
22712
22713
22714
22715
Rtn I
22800
22801
22802
22803
22804
22805
22806
22807
22808
22809
22810
22811
22812
22813
22814
22815
Rtn J
22900
22901
22902
22903
22904
22905
22906
22907
22908
22909
22910
22911
22912
22913
22914
22915
Rtn K
23000
23001
23002
23003
23004
23005
23006
23007
23008
23009
23010
23011
23012
23013
23014
23015
Rtn L
23100
23101
23102
23103
23104
23105
23106
23107
23108
23109
23110
23111
23112
23113
23114
23115
Rtn M
23200
23201
23202
23203
23204
23205
23206
23207
23208
23209
23210
23211
23212
23213
23214
23215
Rtn N
23300
23301
23302
23303
23304
23305
23306
23307
23308
23309
23310
23311
23312
23313
23314
23315
Rtn O
23400
23401
23402
23403
23404
23405
23406
23407
23408
23409
23410
23411
23412
23413
23414
23415
Rtn P
23500
23501
23502
23503
23504
23505
23506
23507
23508
23509
23510
23511
23512
23513
23514
23515
EXP
Out 13
EXP
Out 14
EXP
Out 15
EXP
Out 16
Virtual Return to EXP Output Mix Matrix
EXP
Out 1
EXP
Out 2
EXP
Out 3
EXP
Out 4
EXP
Out 5
EXP
Out 6
EXP
Out 7
EXP
Out 8
EXP
Out 9
EXP
Out 10
EXP
Out 11
EXP
Out 12
Rtn A
22032
22033
22034
22035
22036
22037
22038
22039
22040
22041
22042
22043
22044
22045
22046
22047
Rtn B
22132
22133
22134
22135
22136
22137
22138
22139
22140
22141
22142
22143
22144
22145
22146
22147
Rtn C
22232
22233
22234
22235
22236
22237
22238
22239
22240
22241
22242
22243
22244
22245
22246
22247
Rtn D
22332
22333
22334
22335
22336
22337
22338
22339
22340
22341
22342
22343
22344
22345
22346
22347
Rtn E
22432
22433
22434
22435
22436
22437
22438
22439
22440
22441
22442
22443
22444
22445
22446
22447
Rtn F
22532
22533
22534
22535
22536
22537
22538
22539
22540
22541
22542
22543
22544
22545
22546
22547
Rtn G
22632
22633
22634
22635
22636
22637
22638
22639
22640
22641
22642
22643
22644
22645
22646
22647
Rtn H
22732
22733
22734
22735
22736
22737
22738
22739
22740
22741
22742
22743
22744
22745
22746
22747
Rtn I
22832
22833
22834
22835
22836
22837
22838
22839
22840
22841
22842
22843
22844
22845
22846
22847
Rtn J
22932
22933
22934
22935
22936
22937
22938
22939
22940
22941
22942
22943
22944
22945
22946
22947
Rtn K
23032
23033
23034
23035
23036
23037
23038
23039
23040
23041
23042
23043
23044
23045
23046
23047
Rtn L
23132
23133
23134
23135
23136
23137
23138
23139
23140
23141
23142
23143
23144
23145
23146
23147
Rtn M
23232
23233
23234
23235
23236
23237
23238
23239
23240
23241
23242
23243
23244
23245
23246
23247
Rtn N
23332
23333
23334
23335
23336
23337
23338
23339
23340
23341
23342
23343
23344
23345
23346
23347
Rtn O
23432
23433
23434
23435
23436
23437
23438
23439
23440
23441
23442
23443
23444
23445
23446
23447
Rtn P
23532
23533
23534
23535
23536
23537
23538
23539
23540
23541
23542
23543
23544
23545
23546
23547
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
161
Virtual Return to Virtual Send Mix Matrix
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Rtn A
22016
22017
22018
22019
22020
22021
22022
22023
22024
22025
22026
22027
22028
22029
22030
22031
Rtn B
22116
22117
22118
22119
22120
22121
22122
22123
22124
22125
22126
22127
22128
22129
22130
22131
Rtn C
22216
22217
22218
22219
22220
22221
22222
22223
22224
22225
22226
22227
22228
22229
22230
22231
Rtn D
22316
22317
22318
22016
22320
22321
22322
22323
22324
22325
22326
22327
22328
22329
22330
22331
Rtn E
22416
22417
22418
22419
22016
22421
22422
22423
22424
22425
22426
22427
22428
22429
22430
22431
Rtn F
22516
22517
22518
22519
22520
22016
22522
22523
22524
22525
22526
22527
22528
22529
22530
22531
Rtn G
22616
22617
22618
22619
22620
22621
22016
22623
22624
22625
22626
22627
22628
22629
22630
22631
Rtn H
22716
22717
22718
22719
22720
22721
22722
22016
22724
22725
22726
22727
22728
22729
22730
22731
Rtn I
22816
22817
22818
22819
22820
22821
22822
22823
22016
22825
22826
22827
22828
22829
22830
22831
Rtn J
22916
22917
22918
22919
22920
22921
22922
22923
22924
22016
22926
22927
22928
22929
22930
22931
Rtn K
23016
23017
23018
23019
23020
23021
23022
23023
23024
23025
22016
23027
23028
23029
23030
23031
Rtn L
23116
23117
23118
23119
23120
23121
23122
23123
23124
23125
23126
22016
23128
23129
23130
23131
Rtn M
23216
23217
23218
23219
23220
23221
23222
23223
23224
23225
23226
23227
22016
23229
23230
23231
Rtn N
23316
23317
23318
23319
23320
23321
23322
23323
23324
23325
23326
23327
23328
22016
23330
23331
Rtn O
23416
23417
23418
23419
23420
23421
23422
23423
23424
23425
23426
23427
23428
23429
22016
23431
Rtn P
23516
23517
23518
23519
23520
23521
23522
23523
23524
23525
23526
23527
23528
23529
23530
22016
Out 1
Out 2
Aux
Out 6
Aux
Out 7
Aux
Out 8
Expansion Bus Input to Analog and Aux Output Mix Matrix
Out 3
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
Out 8
Aux
Out 1
Aux
Out 2
Aux
Out 3
Aux
Out 4
Aux
Out 5
Exp 1
23600
23601
23602
23603
23604
23605
23606
23607
23608
23609
23610
23611
23612
23613
23614
23615
Exp 2
23700
23701
23702
23703
23704
23705
23706
23707
23708
23709
23710
23711
23712
23713
23714
23715
Exp 3
23800
23801
23802
23803
23804
23805
23806
23807
23808
23809
23810
23811
23812
23813
23814
23815
Exp 4
23900
23901
23902
23903
23904
23905
23906
23907
23908
23909
23910
23911
23912
23913
23914
23915
Exp 5
24000
24001
24002
24003
24004
24005
24006
24007
24008
24009
24010
24011
24012
24013
24014
24015
Exp 6
24100
24101
24102
24103
24104
24105
24106
24107
24108
24109
24110
24111
24112
24113
24114
24115
Exp 7
24200
24201
24202
24203
24204
24205
24206
24207
24208
24209
24210
24211
24212
24213
24214
24215
Exp 8
24300
24301
24302
24303
24304
24305
24306
24307
24308
24309
24310
24311
24312
24313
24314
24315
Exp 9
24400
24401
24402
24403
24404
24405
24406
24407
24408
24409
24410
24411
24412
24413
24414
24415
Exp 10
24500
24501
24502
24503
24504
24505
24506
24507
24508
24509
24510
24511
24512
24513
24514
24515
Exp 11
24600
24601
24602
24603
24604
24605
24606
24607
24608
24609
24610
24611
24612
24613
24614
24615
Exp 12
24700
24701
24702
24703
24704
24705
24706
24707
24708
24709
24710
24711
24712
24713
24714
24715
Exp 13
24800
24801
24802
24803
24804
24805
24806
24807
24808
24809
24810
24811
24812
24813
24814
24815
Exp 14
24900
24901
24902
24903
24904
24905
24906
24907
24908
24909
24910
24911
24912
24913
24914
24915
Exp 15
25000
25001
25002
25003
25004
25005
25006
25007
25008
25009
25010
25011
25012
25013
25014
25015
Exp 16
25100
25101
25102
25103
25104
25105
25106
25107
25108
25109
25110
25111
25112
25113
25114
25115
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
162
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
Out 8
Aux
Out 1
Aux
Out 2
Aux
Out 3
Aux
Out 4
Aux
Out 5
Aux
Out 6
Aux
Out 7
Aux
Out 8
Exp 17
25200
25201
25202
25203
25204
25205
25206
25207
25208
25209
25210
25211
25212
25213
25214
25215
Exp 18
25300
25301
25302
25303
25304
25305
25306
25307
25308
25309
25310
25311
25312
25313
25314
25315
Exp 19
25400
25401
25402
25403
25404
25405
25406
25407
25408
25409
25410
25411
25412
25413
25414
25415
Exp 20
25500
25501
25502
25503
25504
25505
25506
25507
25508
25509
25510
25511
25512
25513
25514
25515
Exp 21
25600
25601
25602
25603
25604
25605
25606
25607
25608
25609
25610
25611
25612
25613
25614
25615
Exp 22
25700
25701
25702
25703
25704
25705
25706
25707
25708
25709
25710
25711
25712
25713
25714
25715
Exp 23
25800
25801
25802
25803
25804
25805
25806
25807
25808
25809
25810
25811
25812
25813
25814
25815
Exp 24
25900
25901
25902
25903
25904
25905
25906
25907
25908
25909
25910
25911
25912
25913
25914
25915
Exp 25
26000
26001
26002
26003
26004
26005
26006
26007
26008
26009
26010
26011
26012
26013
26014
26015
Exp 26
26100
26101
26102
26103
26104
26105
26106
26107
26108
26109
26110
26111
26112
26113
26114
26115
Exp 27
26200
26201
26202
26203
26204
26205
26206
26207
26208
26209
26210
26211
26212
26213
26214
26215
Exp 28
26300
26301
26302
26303
26304
26305
26306
26307
26308
26309
26310
26311
26312
26313
26314
26315
Exp 29
26400
26401
26402
26403
26404
26405
26406
26407
26408
26409
26410
26411
26412
26413
26414
26415
Exp 30
26500
26501
26502
26503
26504
26505
26506
26507
26508
26509
26510
26511
26512
26513
26514
26515
Exp 31
26600
26601
26602
26603
26604
26605
26606
26607
26608
26609
26610
26611
26612
26613
26614
26615
Exp 32
26700
26701
26702
26703
26704
26705
26706
26707
26708
26709
26710
26711
26712
26713
26714
26715
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
Out 8
Aux
Out 1
Aux
Out 2
Aux
Out 3
Aux
Out 4
Aux
Out 5
Aux
Out 6
Aux
Out 7
Aux
Out 8
Exp 33
26800
26801
26802
26803
26804
26805
26806
26807
26808
26809
26810
26811
26812
26813
26814
26815
Exp 34
26900
26901
26902
26903
26904
26905
26906
26907
26908
26909
26910
26911
26912
26913
26914
26915
Exp 35
27000
27001
27002
27003
27004
27005
27006
27007
27008
27009
27010
27011
27012
27013
27014
27015
Exp 36
27100
27101
27102
27103
27104
27105
27106
27107
27108
27109
27110
27111
27112
27113
27114
27115
Exp 37
27200
27201
27202
27203
27204
27205
27206
27207
27208
27209
27210
27211
27212
27213
27214
27215
Exp 38
27300
27301
27302
27303
27304
27305
27306
27307
27308
27309
27310
27311
27312
27313
27314
27315
Exp 39
27400
27401
27402
27403
27404
27405
27406
27407
27408
27409
27410
27411
27412
27413
27414
27415
Exp 40
27500
27501
27502
27503
27504
27505
27506
27507
27508
27509
27510
27511
27512
27513
27514
27515
Exp 41
27600
27601
27602
27603
27604
27605
27606
27607
27608
27609
27610
27611
27612
27613
27614
27615
Exp 42
27700
27701
27702
27703
27704
27705
27706
27707
27708
27709
27710
27711
27712
27713
27714
27715
Exp 43
27800
27801
27802
27803
27804
27805
27806
27807
27808
27809
27810
27811
27812
27813
27814
27815
Exp 44
27900
27901
27902
27903
27904
27905
27906
27907
27908
27909
27910
27911
27912
27913
27914
27915
Exp 45
28000
28001
28002
28003
28004
28005
28006
28007
28008
28009
28010
28011
28012
28013
28014
28015
Exp 46
28100
28101
28102
28103
28104
28105
28106
28107
28108
28109
28110
28111
28112
28113
28114
28115
Exp 47
28200
28201
28202
28203
28204
28205
28206
28207
28208
28209
28210
28211
28212
28213
28214
28215
Exp 48
28300
28301
28302
28303
28304
28305
28306
28307
28308
28309
28310
28311
28312
28313
28314
28315
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
163
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
Out 8
Aux
Out 1
Aux
Out 2
Aux
Out 3
Aux
Out 4
Aux
Out 5
Aux
Out 6
Aux
Out 7
Aux
Out 8
Exp 49
28400
28401
28402
28403
28404
28405
28406
28407
28408
28409
28410
28411
28412
28413
28414
28415
Exp 50
28500
28501
28502
28503
28504
28505
28506
28507
28508
28509
28510
28511
28512
28513
28514
28515
Exp 51
28600
28601
28602
28603
28604
28605
28606
28607
28608
28609
28610
28611
28612
28613
28614
28615
Exp 52
28700
28701
28702
28703
28704
28705
28706
28707
28708
28709
28710
28711
28712
28713
28714
28715
Exp 53
28800
28801
28802
28803
28804
28805
28806
28807
28808
28809
28810
28811
28812
28813
28814
28815
Exp 54
28900
28901
28902
28903
28904
28905
28906
28907
28908
28909
28910
28911
28912
28913
28914
28915
Exp 55
29000
29001
29002
29003
29004
29005
29006
29007
29008
29009
29010
29011
29012
29013
29014
29015
Exp 56
29100
29101
29102
29103
29104
29105
29106
29107
29108
29109
29110
29111
29112
29113
29114
29115
Exp 57
29200
29201
29202
29203
29204
29205
29206
29207
29208
29209
29210
29211
29212
29213
29214
29215
Exp 58
29300
29301
29302
29303
29304
29305
29306
29307
29308
29309
29310
29311
29312
29313
29314
29315
Exp 59
29400
29401
29402
29403
29404
29405
29406
29407
29408
29409
29410
29411
29412
29413
29414
29415
Exp 60
29500
29501
29502
29503
29504
29505
29506
29507
29508
29509
29510
29511
29512
29513
29514
29515
Exp 61
29600
29601
29602
29603
29604
29605
29606
29607
29608
29609
29610
29611
29612
29613
29614
29615
Exp 62
29700
29701
29702
29703
29704
29705
29706
29707
29708
29709
29710
29711
29712
29713
29714
29715
Exp 63
29800
29801
29802
29803
29804
29805
29806
29807
29808
29809
29810
29811
29812
29813
29814
29815
Exp 64
29900
29901
29902
29903
29904
29905
29906
29907
29908
29909
29910
29911
29912
29913
29914
29915
Expansion Bus to EXP Output Mix Matrix
Exp 1
EXP
Out 1
EXP
Out 2
EXP
Out 3
EXP
Out 4
EXP
Out 5
EXP
Out 6
EXP
Out 7
EXP
Out 8
EXP
Out 9
EXP
Out 10
EXP
Out 11
EXP
Out 12
EXP
Out 13
EXP
Out 14
EXP
Out 15
EXP
Out 16
23632
23633
23634
23635
23636
23637
23638
23639
23640
23641
23642
23643
23644
23645
23646
23647
Exp 2
23732
23733
23734
23735
23736
23737
23738
23739
23740
23741
23742
23743
23744
23745
23746
23747
Exp 3
23832
23833
23834
23835
23836
23837
23838
23839
23840
23841
23842
23843
23844
23845
23846
23847
Exp 4
23932
23933
23934
23935
23936
23937
23938
23939
23940
23941
23942
23943
23944
23945
23946
23947
Exp 5
24032
24033
24034
24035
24036
24037
24038
24039
24040
24041
24042
24043
24044
24045
24046
24047
Exp 6
24132
24133
24134
24135
24136
24137
24138
24139
24140
24141
24142
24143
24144
24145
24146
24147
Exp 7
24232
24233
24234
24235
24236
24237
24238
24239
24240
24241
24242
24243
24244
24245
24246
24247
Exp 8
24332
24333
24334
24335
24336
24337
24338
24339
24340
24341
24342
24343
24344
24345
24346
24347
Exp 9
24432
24433
24434
24435
24436
24437
24438
24439
24440
24441
24442
24443
24444
24445
24446
24447
Exp 10
24532
24533
24534
24535
24536
24537
24538
24539
24540
24541
24542
24543
24544
24545
24546
24547
Exp 11
24632
24633
24634
24635
24636
24637
24638
24639
24640
24641
24642
24643
24644
24645
24646
24647
Exp 12
24732
24733
24734
24735
24736
24737
24738
24739
24740
24741
24742
24743
24744
24745
24746
24747
Exp 13
24832
24833
24834
24835
24836
24837
24838
24839
24840
24841
24842
24843
24844
24845
24846
24847
Exp 14
24932
24933
24934
24935
24936
24937
24938
24939
24940
24941
24942
24943
24944
24945
24946
24947
Exp 15
25032
25033
25034
25035
25036
25037
25038
25039
25040
25041
25042
25043
25044
25045
25046
25047
Exp 16
25132
25133
25134
25135
25136
25137
25138
25139
25140
25141
25142
25143
25144
25145
25146
25147
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
164
EXP
Out 1
EXP
Out 2
EXP
Out 3
EXP
Out 4
EXP
Out 5
EXP
Out 6
EXP
Out 7
EXP
Out 8
EXP
Out 9
EXP
Out 10
EXP
Out 11
EXP
Out 12
EXP
Out 13
EXP
Out 14
EXP
Out 15
EXP
Out 16
Exp 17
25232
25233
25234
25235
25236
25237
25238
25239
25240
25241
25242
25243
25244
25245
25246
25247
Exp 18
25332
25333
25334
25335
25336
25337
25338
25339
25340
25341
25342
25343
25344
25345
25346
25347
Exp 19
25432
25433
25434
25435
25436
25437
25438
25439
25440
25441
25442
25443
25444
25445
25446
25447
Exp 20
25532
25533
25534
25535
25536
25537
25538
25539
25540
25541
25542
25543
25544
25545
25546
25547
Exp 21
25632
25633
25634
25635
25636
25637
25638
25639
25640
25641
25642
25643
25644
25645
25646
25647
Exp 22
25732
25733
25734
25735
25736
25737
25738
25739
25740
25741
25742
25743
25744
25745
25746
25747
Exp 23
25832
25833
25834
25835
25836
25837
25838
25839
25840
25841
25842
25843
25844
25845
25846
25847
Exp 24
25932
25933
25934
25935
25936
25937
25938
25939
25940
25941
25942
25943
25944
25945
25946
25947
Exp 25
26032
26033
26034
26035
26036
26037
26038
26039
26040
26041
26042
26043
26044
26045
26046
26047
Exp 26
26132
26133
26134
26135
26136
26137
26138
26139
26140
26141
26142
26143
26144
26145
26146
26147
Exp 27
26232
26233
26234
26235
26236
26237
26238
26239
26240
26241
26242
26243
26244
26245
26246
26247
Exp 28
26332
26333
26334
26335
26336
26337
26338
26339
26340
26341
26342
26343
26344
26345
26346
26347
Exp 29
26432
26433
26434
26435
26436
26437
26438
26439
26440
26441
26442
26443
26444
26445
26446
26447
Exp 30
26532
26533
26534
26535
26536
26537
26538
26539
26540
26541
26542
26543
26544
26545
26546
26547
Exp 31
26632
26633
26634
26635
26636
26637
26638
26639
26640
26641
26642
26643
26644
26645
26646
26647
Exp 32
26732
26733
26734
26735
26736
26737
26738
26739
26740
26741
26742
26743
26744
26745
26746
26747
EXP
Out 1
EXP
Out 2
EXP
Out 3
EXP
Out 4
EXP
Out 5
EXP
Out 6
EXP
Out 7
EXP
Out 8
EXP
Out 9
EXP
Out 10
EXP
Out 11
EXP
Out 12
EXP
Out 13
EXP
Out 14
EXP
Out 15
EXP
Out 16
Exp 33
26832
26833
26834
26835
26836
26837
26838
26839
26840
26841
26842
26843
26844
26845
26846
26847
Exp 34
26932
26933
26934
26935
26936
26937
26938
26939
26940
26941
26942
26943
26944
26945
26946
26947
Exp 35
27032
27033
27034
27035
27036
27037
27038
27039
27040
27041
27042
27043
27044
27045
27046
27047
Exp 36
27132
27133
27134
27135
27136
27137
27138
27139
27140
27141
27142
27143
27144
27145
27146
27147
Exp 37
27232
27233
27234
27235
27236
27237
27238
27239
27240
27241
27242
27243
27244
27245
27246
27247
Exp 38
27332
27333
27334
27335
27336
27337
27338
27339
27340
27341
27342
27343
27344
27345
27346
27347
Exp 39
27432
27433
27434
27435
27436
27437
27438
27439
27440
27441
27442
27443
27444
27445
27446
27447
Exp 40
27532
27533
27534
27535
27536
27537
27538
27539
27540
27541
27542
27543
27544
27545
27546
27547
Exp 41
27632
27633
27634
27635
27636
27637
27638
27639
27640
27641
27642
27643
27644
27645
27646
27647
Exp 42
27732
27733
27734
27735
27736
27737
27738
27739
27740
27741
27742
27743
27744
27745
27746
27747
Exp 43
27832
27833
27834
27835
27836
27837
27838
27839
27840
27841
27842
27843
27844
27845
27846
27847
Exp 44
27932
27933
27934
27935
27936
27937
27938
27939
27940
27941
27942
27943
27944
27945
27946
27947
Exp 45
28032
28033
28034
28035
28036
28037
28038
28039
28040
28041
28042
28043
28044
28045
28046
28047
Exp 46
28132
28133
28134
28135
28136
28137
28138
28139
28140
28141
28142
28143
28144
28145
28146
28147
Exp 47
28232
28233
28234
28235
28236
28237
28238
28239
28240
28241
28242
28243
28244
28245
28246
28247
Exp 48
28332
28333
28334
28335
28336
28337
28338
28339
28340
28341
28342
28343
28344
28345
28346
28347
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
165
EXP
Out 1
EXP
Out 2
EXP
Out 3
EXP
Out 4
EXP
Out 5
EXP
Out 6
EXP
Out 7
EXP
Out 8
EXP
Out 9
EXP
Out 10
EXP
Out 11
EXP
Out 12
EXP
Out 13
EXP
Out 14
EXP
Out 15
EXP
Out 16
Exp 49
28432
28433
28434
28435
28436
28437
28438
28439
28440
28441
28442
28443
28444
28445
28446
28447
Exp 50
28532
28533
28534
28535
28536
28537
28538
28539
28540
28541
28542
28543
28544
28545
28546
28547
Exp 51
28632
28633
28634
28635
28636
28637
28638
28639
28640
28641
28642
28643
28644
28645
28646
28647
Exp 52
28732
28733
28734
28735
28736
28737
28738
28739
28740
28741
28742
28743
28744
28745
28746
28747
Exp 53
28832
28833
28834
28835
28836
28837
28838
28839
28840
28841
28842
28843
28844
28845
28846
28847
Exp 54
28932
28933
28934
28935
28936
28937
28938
28939
28940
28941
28942
28943
28944
28945
28946
28947
Exp 55
29032
29033
29034
29035
29036
29037
29038
29039
29040
29041
29042
29043
29044
29045
29046
29047
Exp 56
29132
29133
29134
29135
29136
29137
29138
29139
29140
29141
29142
29143
29144
29145
29146
29147
Exp 57
29232
29233
29234
29235
29236
29237
29238
29239
29240
29241
29242
29243
29244
29245
29246
29247
Exp 58
29332
29333
29334
29335
29336
29337
29338
29339
29340
29341
29342
29343
29344
29345
29346
29347
Exp 59
29432
29433
29434
29435
29436
29437
29438
29439
29440
29441
29442
29443
29444
29445
29446
29447
Exp 60
29532
29533
29534
29535
29536
29537
29538
29539
29540
29541
29542
29543
29544
29545
29546
29547
Exp 61
29632
29633
29634
29635
29636
29637
29638
29639
29640
29641
29642
29643
29644
29645
29646
29647
Exp 62
29732
29733
29734
29735
29736
29737
29738
29739
29740
29741
29742
29743
29744
29745
29746
29747
Exp 63
29832
29833
29834
29835
29836
29837
29838
29839
29840
29841
29842
29843
29844
29845
29846
29847
Exp 64
29932
29933
29934
29935
29936
29937
29938
29939
29940
29941
29942
29943
29944
29945
29946
29947
Expansion Bus to Virtual Send Mix Matrix
Exp 1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
23616
23617
23618
23619
23620
23621
23622
23623
23624
23625
23626
23627
23628
23629
23630
23631
Exp 2
23716
23717
23718
23719
23720
23721
23722
23723
23724
23725
23726
23727
23728
23729
23730
23731
Exp 3
23816
23817
23818
23819
23820
23821
23822
23823
23824
23825
23826
23827
23828
23829
23830
23831
Exp 4
23916
23917
23918
23919
23920
23921
23922
23923
23924
23925
23926
23927
23928
23929
23930
23931
Exp 5
24016
24017
24018
24019
24020
24021
24022
24023
24024
24025
24026
24027
24028
24029
24030
24031
Exp 6
24116
24117
24118
24119
24120
24121
24122
24123
24124
24125
24126
24127
24128
24129
24130
24131
Exp 7
24216
24217
24218
24219
24220
24221
24222
24223
24224
24225
24226
24227
24228
24229
24230
24231
Exp 8
24316
24317
24318
24319
24320
24321
24322
24323
24324
24325
24326
24327
24328
24329
24330
24331
Exp 9
24416
24417
24418
24419
24420
24421
24422
24423
24424
24425
24426
24427
24428
24429
24430
24431
Exp 10
24516
24517
24518
24519
24520
24521
24522
24523
24524
24525
24526
24527
24528
24529
24530
24531
Exp 11
24616
24617
24618
24619
24620
24621
24622
24623
24624
24625
24626
24627
24628
24629
24630
24631
Exp 12
24716
24717
24718
24719
24720
24721
24722
24723
24724
24725
24726
24727
24728
24729
24730
24731
Exp 13
24816
24817
24818
24819
24820
24821
24822
24823
24824
24825
24826
24827
24828
24829
24830
24831
Exp 14
24916
24917
24918
24919
24920
24921
24922
24923
24924
24925
24926
24927
24928
24929
24930
24931
Exp 15
25016
25017
25018
25019
25020
25021
25022
25023
25024
25025
25026
25027
25028
25029
25030
25031
Exp 16
25116
25117
25118
25119
25120
25121
25122
25123
25124
25125
25126
25127
25128
25129
25130
25131
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
166
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Exp 17
25216
25217
25218
25219
25220
25221
25222
25223
25224
25225
25226
25227
25228
25229
25230
25231
Exp 18
25316
25317
25318
25319
25320
25321
25322
25323
25324
25325
25326
25327
25328
25329
25330
25331
Exp 19
25416
25417
25418
25419
25420
25421
25422
25423
25424
25425
25426
25427
25428
25429
25430
25431
Exp 20
25516
25517
25518
25519
25520
25521
25522
25523
25524
25525
25526
25527
25528
25529
25530
25531
Exp 21
25616
25617
25618
25619
25620
25621
25622
25623
25624
25625
25626
25627
25628
25629
25630
25631
Exp 22
25716
25717
25718
25719
25720
25721
25722
25723
25724
25725
25726
25727
25728
25729
25730
25731
Exp 23
25816
25817
25818
25819
25820
25821
25822
25823
25824
25825
25826
25827
25828
25829
25830
25831
Exp 24
25916
25917
25918
25919
25920
25921
25922
25923
25924
25925
25926
25927
25928
25929
25930
25931
Exp 25
26016
26017
26018
26019
26020
26021
26022
26023
26024
26025
26026
26027
26028
26029
26030
26031
Exp 26
26116
26117
26118
26119
26120
26121
26122
26123
26124
26125
26126
26127
26128
26129
26130
26131
Exp 27
26216
26217
26218
26219
26220
26221
26222
26223
26224
26225
26226
26227
26228
26229
26230
26231
Exp 28
26316
26317
26318
26319
26320
26321
26322
26323
26324
26325
26326
26327
26328
26329
26330
26331
Exp 29
26416
26417
26418
26419
26420
26421
26422
26423
26424
26425
26426
26427
26428
26429
26430
26431
Exp 30
26516
26517
26518
26519
26520
26521
26522
26523
26524
26525
26526
26527
26528
26529
26530
26531
Exp 31
26616
26617
26618
26619
26620
26621
26622
26623
26624
26625
26626
26627
26628
26629
26630
26631
Exp 32
26716
26717
26718
26719
26720
26721
26722
26723
26724
26725
26726
26727
26728
26729
26730
26731
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Exp 33
26816
26817
26818
26819
26820
26821
26822
26823
26824
26825
26826
26827
26828
26829
26830
26831
Exp 34
26916
26917
26918
26919
26920
26921
26922
26923
26924
26925
26926
26927
26928
26929
26930
26931
Exp 35
27016
27017
27018
27019
27020
27021
27022
27023
27024
27025
27026
27027
27028
27029
27030
27031
Exp 36
27116
27117
27118
27119
27120
27121
27122
27123
27124
27125
27126
27127
27128
27129
27130
27131
Exp 37
27216
27217
27218
27219
27220
27221
27222
27223
27224
27225
27226
27227
27228
27229
27230
27231
Exp 38
27316
27317
27318
27319
27320
27321
27322
27323
27324
27325
27326
27327
27328
27329
27330
27331
Exp 39
27416
27417
27418
27419
27420
27421
27422
27423
27424
27425
27426
27427
27428
27429
27430
27431
Exp 40
27516
27517
27518
27519
27520
27521
27522
27523
27524
27525
27526
27527
27528
27529
27530
27531
Exp 41
27616
27617
27618
27619
27620
27621
27622
27623
27624
27625
27626
27627
27628
27629
27630
27631
Exp 42
27716
27717
27718
27719
27720
27721
27722
27723
27724
27725
27726
27727
27728
27729
27730
27731
Exp 43
27816
27817
27818
27819
27820
27821
27822
27823
27824
27825
27826
27827
27828
27829
27830
27831
Exp 44
27916
27917
27918
27919
27920
27921
27922
27923
27924
27925
27926
27927
27928
27929
27930
27931
Exp 45
28016
28017
28018
28019
28020
28021
28022
28023
28024
28025
28026
28027
28028
28029
28030
28031
Exp 46
28116
28117
28118
28119
28120
28121
28122
28123
28124
28125
28126
28127
28128
28129
28130
28131
Exp 47
28216
28217
28218
28219
28220
28221
28222
28223
28224
28225
28226
28227
28228
28229
28230
28231
Exp 48
28316
28317
28318
28319
28320
28321
28322
28323
28324
28325
28326
28327
28328
28329
28330
28331
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Remote Control and Configuration
167
Web Pages
This section describes web page operation and control of the DMP 128 FlexPlus and covers
the following topics:
•
DMP 128 FlexPlus Web Page
•
DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP Web Page
•
Special Characters
The DMP 128 FlexPlus can be accessed by a PC or control system using a rear panel
Ethernet LAN port (non-V-model) or LAN/VoIP port (V-model only) and a web browser
such as Microsoft© Internet Explorer. There are potentially two web pages installed on the
DMP 128 FlexPlus, one for general configuration and one for VoIP configuration (V-model
only). These web pages are factory‑installed HTML pages and cannot be erased or
overwritten.
NOTE: If the Ethernet connection to the device is unstable, try turning off the proxy
server in the web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, click Tools > Internet
Options > Connections > LAN Settings, uncheck the Use a proxy server... , then
click OK.
DMP 128 FlexPlus Web Page
Accessing the Embedded Web Page
1. From a web browser, enter the device IP address into the address field.
NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the IP address, and the
device has not been assigned an IP address via DHCP, the default address (LAN
for non-V-model, LAN 1 for V-model) is 192.168.254.254.
2. Press <Enter>. The device checks the password protection status, if a password is
required, enter the password in the Connect to... dialog box and press <Enter>. No
username is required.
3. The device checks several possibilities in the following order and responds accordingly:
a. If the address includes a specific file name, such as
192.168.254.254/file_name.html, the device downloads the web page.
b. If there is a file in the device memory named index.html, the device downloads
index.html as the default startup page.
c. If a and b do not apply, the device downloads the factory-installed default startup
page, nortxe_index.html, also known as the System Status page.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
168
Using the Web Page
1 Communications Settings Panel
2 RS-232 Settings Panel
3 Device Info Panel
4 Device Name Edit Button
5 Firmware Update Button
6 Date/Time Settings Panel
7 Passwords Panel
Figure 192. DMP 128 FlexPlus Web Page
1
Communications Settings Panel — Displays TCP/IP communication settings. Click
Edit to open the Communication Settings dialog box and edit the TCP/IP settings.
Figure 193. Communication Settings Dialog Box
From this dialog box DHCP status, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway can
be edited. The device MAC address can also be viewed in this dialog box.
NOTE: If Use DHCP is enabled, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway can
not be edited.
2
3
RS-232 Settings Panel — Provides a read-only display of device RS-232 settings.
Device Info Panel — Displays general device information.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
169
4
Device Name Edit Button — Click the Edit button to the right of the device name to
open the Device Name dialog box. In this dialog box, the current name can be edited to
a user-defined name or reset back to the default name.
Figure 194. Device Name Dialog Box
5
Firmware Update Button — Click the Update button to open the Firmware Update
dialog box.
Figure 195. Firmware Update Dialog Box
Click the Browse button to open the Choose a File to Upload dialog box where a
firmware file can be selected to upload.
NOTE: Only files with a .S19 and .eff extensions are accepted.
Figure 196. File to Upload Dialog Box
For information regarding the download and installation of firmware files, see
Downloading Firmware Updates on page 88.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
170
6
Date/Time Settings Panel — Displays date, time, and time zone information for the
device. Click Sync to PC to sync date and time information on the device with the
date and time on the host computer. Alternatively, click Set Manually to open the Date
and Time Settings dialog box which allows the user to set date, time, and time zone
information.
Figure 197. Date and Time Settings Dialog Box
7
Passwords Panel — Click the Set button in the Passwords panel to open the
Passwords dialog box which allows users to set admin and user passwords. Enter and
confirm a password, then click Apply to apply the password.
NOTES:
• An administrator password must be applied before a user password can be
applied.
• The factory configured password for this device has been set to the device
serial number. Passwords are case sensitive. Performing a Reset to Factory
Defaults removes the password.
Figure 198. Passwords Dialog Box
DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP Web Page
Accessing the Embedded VoIP Web Page
1. From a web browser, enter the device IP address into the address field followed by
/www/voip.html.
NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the IP address, and
the device has not been assigned an IP address via DHCP, the default address is
192.168.254.254.
2. Press <Enter>.
3. If a username and password have been set to access the basic DMP 128 FlexPlus web
page, the same username and password are required to access the VoIP web page.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
171
Using the VoIP Web Page
Home Page
The Home page displays high level information about the DMP 128 FlexPlus VoIP
configuration.
1 Navigation Tabs
2 VoIP Status Panel
3 Details Panel
Figure 199. VoIP Home Page
1
Navigation Tabs — Click these tabs to navigate to the respective pages for network
configuration, line registration, system logs, and configuration file import or export.
2
VoIP Status Panel — This panel displays the status of the following parameters for
each VoIP line:
3
•
Line — Displays the VoIP line number.
•
Registration — Displays the current registration status of that line. Registered lines
indicate whether the primary or secondary server is used.
•
Audio DSP — Displays whether the line is assigned to an Aux channel in the DMP
128 FlexPlus (Configured) or the line is not assigned to an Aux channel (Not
Configured) (see Aux Inputs on page 41 for more information).
•
Call Status — Displays a green “off hook” (active) or a red “on hook” (inactive) icon
depending on the call status of that line.
•
Packets Rx — Displays the total number of packets received on the line for the
current call.
•
Packets Dropped — Displays the total number of packets dropped on that line for
the current call.
•
Jitter Rx — Displays the current inbound network jitter value for that line in the
current call (highest network jitter value if multiple appearances of jitter).
•
Duration — Displays the duration of the current call in hh:mm:ss format.
Details Panel — Displays the details of each appearance within the line currently
selected in the VoIP Status panel including the current codec in use, call duration,
packets received, packets dropped, and inbound jitter.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
172
Network Page
The Network page has drop-down ribbons and tabs that are used to configure VoIP network
settings. There are four tabs available for VoIP configuration.
• Interface
• Transport on page 175
• QoS/LLDP-MED on the next page
• NAT Traversal on page 177
Interface
1 VoIP Interface
2 LAN 1 Configuration
3 LAN 2 Configuration
4 VLAN Configuration
5 Apply Button
Figure 200. VoIP Network Interface Page
1
VoIP Interface — Select the desired LAN/VoIP port to be used for VoIP network traffic.
Options are LAN 1, LAN 2, and VLAN.
NOTE: Only select VLAN when joining a tagged network port on the switch. LAN 1 or
LAN 2 must be selected within the VLAN ribbon. Enter an appropriate VLAN ID tag
and select DHCP or Static IP configuration.
2
LAN 1 Configuration — Select DHCP, or select Static and enter a valid IP
configuration.
3
LAN 2 Configuration — Select DHCP, or select Static and enter a valid IP
configuration.
4
VLAN Configuration — This ribbon is only available when VLAN is selected from the
VoIP Interface drop-down. Use the fields to enter a VLAN IP configuration.
5
Apply Button — Click the Apply button to commit interface changes to the device.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
173
QoS/LLDP-MED
1 QoS Configuration
2 LLDP-MED Configuration
3 Apply Button
Figure 201. VoIP Network QoS/LLDP-MED Page
1
QoS Configuration
1. Use the QoS Layer 2 drop-down to specify the PCP (Priority Code Point)
decimal value for layer 2 network frames. The default selection is 3 - Critical
Applications.
2. Use the QoS Layer 3 (SIP) drop-down to specify the DSCP (Differentiated
Services Code Point) decimal value for layer 3 SIP network packets. The default
selection is 24 - Call Signaling.
3. Use the QoS Layer 3 (RTP) drop-down to specify the DSCP (Differentiated
Services Code Point) decimal value for layer 3 RTP network packets. The default
selection is 46 - Voice.
NOTE: Consult the VoIP system administrator before changing any QoS values.
2 LLDP-MED Configuration
1. Select Enable or Disable (default) for LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery).
2. Select the VLAN ID checkbox to read the voice VLAN ID from the network and
automatically configure the DMP 128 FlexPlus VLAN tag (VLAN must be selected
as the interface for this feature to work).
3. Select the Qos PCP checkbox to read PCP values from the network and
automatically configure layer 2 QoS.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
174
4. Select the QoS DSCP checkbox to read DSCP values from the network and
automatically configure layer 3 QoS.
NOTE: VLAN ID, QoS PCP, and QoS DSCP values read from the network and
applied to the DMP 128 FlexPlus overwrite any manually specified values.
5. Select the Inventory checkbox to send the DMP 128 FlexPlus model number, part
number, and firmware details to the network switch.
6. Select the Civic Location checkbox to send the location details entered into the
Civic Location panel. This is useful when logging the physical location of the
DMP 128 FlexPlus for network management purposes.
3
Apply Button — Click the Apply button to commit Qos and LLDP-MED changes to the
device.
Transport
1 Transport Protocol Configuration
2 Use Secure RTP (AES CTR) Checkbox
3 TLS Mode Drop-Down
4 Local Mode Drop-Down
5 Local Cert
6 Private Key
7 Server Certs
8 Apply Button
Figure 202. VoIP Network Transport Page
1
Transport Protocol Configuration — Select UDP (default), TCP, or TLS transport
protocols.
NOTE: When TLS is selected, the listening port changes from 5060 to 5061. The
listening port can be manually adjusted.
2
Use Secure RTP (AES CTR) Checkbox — Check this box to encrypt RTP audio
streams using the AES CTR cipher.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
175
3
TLS Mode Drop-Down — Choose Always Allow or Always Verify TLS modes.
NOTE: This option is only available when TLS is selected as the transport protocol.
4
Local Mode Drop-Down — Choose a default local certificate or upload a custom
local certificate to the DMP 128 FlexPlus. When the default certificate is selected, click
Generate to force the DMP 128 FlexPlus to self-generate a new local certificate and
private key. Self‑generated certificates can be exported by clicking the Export button.
NOTE: Certificates and private keys must be in the Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM)
format. The certificate filename cannot be longer than 32 characters, including the
.pem extension.
5
Local Cert — If Local Mode is set to Upload, click the Browse button to locate a
certificate on the host PC. Click Import to commit this certificate to the DMP 128
FlexPlus. Click Export to save the current local certificate to the default download
directory of the web browser on the host PC.
6
Private Key — If Local Mode is set to Upload, click the Browse button to locate a
private key on the host PC. Click Import to commit this key to the DMP 128 FlexPlus.
Click Export to save the current private key to the default download directory of the
web browser on the host PC.
7
Server Certs — Displays up to eight server certificates that can be stored on the
DMP 128 FlexPlus at any one time. The following buttons are also available.
8
•
Add Cert — Click to add a server certificate to the system.
•
Add CA — Click to add a Certificate Authority certificate to the system.
•
Remove — Highlight a listed certificate and click this button to remove it from the
system.
Apply Button — Commits changes made to the transport protocol configuration to the
DMP 128 FlexPlus.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
176
NAT Traversal
1 NAT Traversal Configuration
2 STUN Server Address
3 STUN Port
4 TURN Server Address
5 TURN Port
6 TURN Username
7 TURN Password
8 Apply Button
Figure 203. VoIP Network NAT Traversal Page
1
NAT Traversal Configuration — From the drop-down, select Disabled (default), STUN
Server, TURN Server, or STUN/TURN (ICE) as the NAT traversal method used by the
system.
NOTE: When NAT Traversal is set to STUN/TURN (ICE), both STUN and TURN fields
can be completed. ICE then automatically determines the appropriate method for
traversal.
2
STUN Server Address — Specify the IP address or domain name of the STUN server
to be used.
3
4
STUN Port — Specify the port number of the STUN server.
5
6
TURN Port — Specify the port number of the TURN server.
7
TURN Password (optional) — Enter the password for the TURN server, if one is
required.
8
Apply Button — Click Apply to commit changes.
TURN Server Address — Specify the IP address or domain name of the TURN server
to be used.
TURN Username (optional) — Enter the username for the TURN server, if one is
required.
NOTE: When changes are committed with the Apply button, network services on
the DMP 128 FlexPlus restart. This process can take up to 30 seconds.
NOTE: For more information regarding VoIP network configuration, refer to the
DMP 128 FlexPlus product page on www.extron.com.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
177
Line Pages
Click a Line tab for configuration options. There are three pages used for line configuration.
Registration Page
Figure 204. VoIP Line Registration Page
To register a SIP account:
1. In the User Name field (see figure 204, 1 above), enter the user name currently
assigned to the DMP 128 FlexPlus through the call server.
NOTE: “User Name” is referred to as “Line Extension” by some call servers.
2. In the Authentication User Name field (2), enter a name for the line (optional). In some
cases, this will be the same as the user name entered in step 1.
3. In the Authentication Password field (3), enter the call server registration password.
NOTE: If a password is not required by the call server, leave this field blank.
4. In the Display Name field (4), enter a display name for the line (optional).
5. In the Primary Proxy Name/IP field (5), enter the call server IP address or domain
name.
6. In the Primary Proxy Port field (6), enter the SIP traffic port number.
NOTE: If no port number is specified by the user, 5060 is used by default.
7. Click Apply (7) to commit the changes to the DMP 128 FlexPlus (click Clear to clear all
fields). Committing the changes does not initiate line registration with the call server.
8. Click Register (8) to initiate registration with the call server. Registration is confirmed in
the Status field next to the Register button.
NOTE: If registration is unsuccessful, refer to the logs page (see Logs Page on
page 181) and contact the VoIP system administrator.
NOTES:
• To unregister a line from the call server, click Unregister (9).
• To clear data from a field, delete the data from the field and click Apply (7).
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
178
Advanced Options
The Advanced ribbon (see figure 204, ¢ on the previous page) at the bottom of the page
allows a secondary proxy to be specified for redundancy purposes.
Audio Page
On the Audio page, codecs can be added or removed from the selected line. Codecs
added to the line are available during call negotiation. A minimum of one codec must be
present in the Assigned column. Codecs placed higher on the list are treated as preferred
codecs during call negotiation.
Figure 205. VoIP Line Audio Configuration Page
To add a codec to the Assigned column:
1. Select the desired codec in the Available column (see figure 205, 1 above).
2. Click the right arrow (2) button between the two columns.
3. The codec moves from the Available column to the Assigned column (3).
To change codec priority in the Assigned column:
1. Select a codec in the Assigned column (1).
2. Click and drag that codec to the desired position in the list.
To remove a codec from the Assigned column:
1. Select the codec in the Assigned column (1).
2. Click the left arrow button between the two columns (4).
3. The codec moves from the Assigned column to the Available column (3).
Click Apply to commit changes to codec configuration.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
179
Dialing Page
The Dialing page allows dialing behavior to be configured for the selected line.
1 DTMF Delivery Mode
2 Auto-answer Drop-Down
3 Delay (seconds) Field
4 Apply Button
Figure 206. VoIP Line Dialing Page
1
DTMF Delivery Mode — Select the DTMF delivery mode.
NOTE: Always consult with the VoIP system administrator to determine the correct
DTMF mode.
2
Auto-answer Drop-Down — Use this drop-down menu to turn auto-answer features
On or Off.
3
Delay (seconds) Field — If auto-answer is enabled, enter the amount of delay in
seconds before the call is automatically answered.
4
Apply Button — After configuring the dialing behavior of the selected line, click Apply
to commit the changes to the line.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
180
Logs Page
The Logs page provides a running log of SIP transaction relating to all lines on the device.
Issues such as registration errors and call failures can be identified on this page without
having to use external troubleshooting tools.
1 Log Window
2 Active Checkbox
3 Clear Display Button
4 Export Button
Figure 207. VoIP Logs Page
1
2
Log Window — Displays SIP transaction, including SDP.
3
4
Clear Display Button — Clears all log data currently in the log window.
Active Checkbox — This box is unchecked by default. Check this box to activate
transaction logging.
Export Button — Exports the contents of the log window to a text file. The exported
text file is automatically stored in the default download directory of the web browser.
NOTE: For more information regarding VoIP logs, refer to the DMP 128 FlexPlus product
page on www.extron.com.
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
181
System Page
The System page allows users to export VoIP configurations to a JSON file. These
configuration files are used to return DMP 128 FlexPlus devices to a known VoIP
configuration. Additionally, partial configurations (individual JSON fields) can be applied using
the import tool.
Figure 208. VoIP System Page
To import a system configuration:
1. Click Browse (1) in the Import System Configuration panel.
2. Locate the system configuration file to be imported.
3. Click Import (2).
NOTE: It may take up to 30 seconds to import settings. A dialog box opens to indicate a
successful import.
To export a system configuration:
1. Click Export (3) in the Export System Configuration panel.
2. The exported JSON file is automatically stored in the default download directory of the
web browser.
Special Characters
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The device does
not accept the following characters as part of preset names, device names, passwords, or
locally create file names:
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ` “ ; : \ | ?
DMP 128 FlexPlus • Web Pages
182
Extron Warranty
Extron Electronics warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years
from the date of purchase. In the event of malfunction during the warranty period attributable directly to faulty
workmanship and/or materials, Extron Electronics will, at its option, repair or replace said products or components,
to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore said product to proper operating condition, provided that it is
returned within the warranty period, with proof of purchase and description of malfunction to:
USA, Canada, South America,
and Central America:
Extron Electronics
1230 South Lewis Street
Anaheim, CA 92805
U.S.A.
Asia:
Extron Asia Pte Ltd
135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01
PM Industrial Bldg.
Singapore 368363
Singapore
Japan:
Extron Electronics, Japan
Kyodo Building, 16 Ichibancho
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082
Japan
Europe:
Extron Europe
Hanzeboulevard 10
3825 PH Amersfoort
The Netherlands
China:
Extron China
686 Ronghua Road
Songjiang District
Shanghai 201611
China
Middle East:
Extron Middle East
Dubai Airport Free Zone
F13, PO Box 293666
United Arab Emirates, Dubai
Africa:
Extron South Africa
3rd Floor, South Tower
160 Jan Smuts Avenue
Rosebank 2196, South Africa
This Limited Warranty does not apply if the fault has been caused by misuse, improper handling care, electrical
or mechanical abuse, abnormal operating conditions, or if modifications were made to the product that were not
authorized by Extron.
NOTE: If a product is defective, please call Extron and ask for an Application Engineer to receive an RA (Return
Authorization) number. This will begin the repair process.
USA:
714.491.1500 or 800.633.9876
Europe: 31.33.453.4040 or 800.3987.6673
Africa: 27.11.447.6162
Asia:
65.6383.4400
Japan:
81.3.3511.7655
Middle East:
971.4.299.1800
Units must be returned insured, with shipping charges prepaid. If not insured, you assume the risk of loss or damage
during shipment. Returned units must include the serial number and a description of the problem, as well as the
name of the person to contact in case there are any questions.
Extron Electronics makes no further warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the product and its quality,
performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular use. In no event will Extron Electronics be liable for direct,
indirect, or consequential damages resulting from any defect in this product even if Extron Electronics has been
advised of such damage.
Please note that laws vary from state to state and country to country, and that some provisions of this warranty may
not apply to you.
Contact Information
Worldwide Headquarters: Extron USA West, 1025 E. Ball Road, Anaheim, CA 92805, 800.633.9876
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement